JP7611040B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays variable information and can be controlled to provide an advantageous state for the player.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines , there are those that are capable of executing a variable display of decorative patterns (performance identification information) and are also capable of executing pseudo-consecutive performances (specific performances) that include temporary stopping and re-variable display of pseudo-consecutive patterns ( predetermined performance identification information) during the variable display of the decorative patterns (see, for example, Patent Document 1) .

JP 2016-131876 A

There was room for improving the marketability of a gaming machine having the functions and configuration of Patent Document 1 .

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to the means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player by performing variable display of performance identification information,
A start-time performance execution means capable of executing a start-time performance in response to the start of the advantageous state;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect by temporarily stopping the specific effect identification information at a predetermined timing during the variable display and then restarting the variable display;
A suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggestion performance that suggests that the predetermined performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies that the predetermined performance identification information has been temporarily stopped;
A special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance after the execution of the notification performance;
Equipped with
the suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestion performance, a performance in which visibility of performance identification information different from the predetermined performance identification information is temporarily reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display different from the predetermined performance identification information, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state;
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance in which performance identification information different from the predetermined performance identification information is made invisible;
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the predetermined performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the predetermined performance identification information does not temporarily stop, is capable of continuously displaying the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed;
In a case where the predetermined effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, a moving speed of the predetermined effect identification information before the predetermined timing is different from a moving speed of the predetermined effect identification information after the predetermined timing,
The start-time performance execution means is capable of executing a common start-time performance in a case where the game is controlled to a first state after the advantageous state ends and in a case where the game is controlled to a second state after the advantageous state ends;
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect that displays a specific display corresponding to the number of times the variable display is restarted, which is different from the suggestive effect and the notification effect,
In the special performance, the specific display may be displayed in a first size, a second size larger than the first size, and a third size smaller than the second size.
The execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the suggestion effect,
The execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the notification effect.
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.
The gaming machine according to the means 1 is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state advantageous to a player by performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) and deriving and displaying a display result, and includes special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, variable display pattern determination means capable of determining a variable display pattern, notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications including a value notification that notifies the result of the value acquired by the player, and specific performance execution means (e.g., performance control means) capable of executing a specific performance (e.g., pseudo consecutive performance) that temporarily stops the specific performance identification information at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of the performance identification information to the deriving and displaying of the display result, and then resumes the variable display. the CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 19 ), a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a suggestion performance (for example, a temporary stop suggestion performance) suggesting that the specific performance identification information will be temporarily stopped, and an announcement performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing an announcement performance (for example, a temporary stop announcement performance) to announce that the specific performance identification information has been temporarily stopped, the special state control means is capable of control to the special state until a first number of variable displays are executed after the advantageous state ends, and the announcement means issues the value announcement during a variable display in which the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is the first number. the advantageous state includes a first type advantageous state and a second type advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern using specific determination data when the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state is the first number of times, and is capable of determining a variable display pattern using normal determination data when the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state is less than the first number of times, the normal determination data being capable of determining any one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern and a special variable display pattern, corresponding to a variable display that is a trigger for control to the first type advantageous state, and is capable of determining the specific variable display pattern and the special variable display pattern, corresponding to a variable display that is a trigger for control to the second type advantageous state. is data that enables one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns including different predetermined variable display patterns to be determined, and the specific determination data is data that determines the specific variable display pattern in both the case of a variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state and the case of a variable display that triggers control to the second type advantageous state, and determines a notification variable display pattern that can execute the value notification by the notification means in response to a variable display that does not trigger control to the advantageous state, and the specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the notification variable display pattern (here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "04". The specific determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variable pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be, for example, table data of a variation pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-1, PB3-2, etc. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8, etc.
The type-common variable display pattern may be, for example, a variable pattern PB3-2. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, a variable pattern PB1-8, PB1-9. The variable display period may be shorter, for example, in the case of the variable pattern PB3-2 compared to the variable patterns PB1-8, PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32. The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestion performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 20-33 and 20-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a concentration line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentration line at a density D2). The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestion performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying a concentration line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentration line at a density D2. As the notification effect, it is possible to execute an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is invisible (for example, as shown in Figures 20-34 and 20-35, a portion in which the decorative patterns on the left and right are invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5), and the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and if the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display can be continued to be displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in Figure 20-44, when a temporary stop suggestive effect is executed and the pseudo-consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, a portion in which the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5). With such a configuration, an increase in data volume is prevented, and the element of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result is increased, thereby improving interest in the variable display; the suggestive effect can increase the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can increase the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. If a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's disappointment at the temporary stop. This can improve interest in the game, and thereby improve the marketability of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to the means 2 is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player by performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) and deriving and displaying a display result, and includes special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, variable display pattern determination means capable of determining a variable display pattern, notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications including a value notification that notifies the result of the value acquired by the player, and specific performance execution means (e.g., performance control means) capable of executing a specific performance (e.g., pseudo consecutive performance) in which, as the variable display, at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the performance identification information to the deriving and displaying of the display result, a special identification information different from the performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is resumed (e.g., pseudo consecutive performance). the CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 19 ), a suggestion performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a suggestion performance (for example, a temporary stop suggestion performance) suggesting that the special identification information will be temporarily stopped, and an announcement performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing an announcement performance (for example, a temporary stop announcement performance) to announce that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped, the special state control means is capable of control to the special state until a first number of variable displays are executed after the advantageous state ends, and the announcement means executes the value announcement during the variable display in which the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is the first number. The advantageous state includes a first type advantageous state and a second type advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern using specific determination data when the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state is the first number of times, and is capable of determining a variable display pattern using normal determination data when the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state is less than the first number of times, and the normal determination data is capable of determining any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern and a special variable display pattern, corresponding to a variable display that is a trigger for control to the first type advantageous state, and is capable of determining a variable display pattern different from the specific variable display pattern and the special variable display pattern, corresponding to a variable display that is a trigger for control to the second type advantageous state. The specific determination data is data that determines the specific variable display pattern in both the case of a variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state and the case of a variable display that triggers control to the second type advantageous state, and determines a notification variable display pattern that can execute the value notification by the notification means in response to a variable display that does not trigger control to the advantageous state, and the specific variable display pattern is a variable display pattern having a shorter variable display period than the notification variable display pattern (here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "04". The specific determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table specified when the variable pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected.
The normal determination data may be, for example, table data of a variation pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-1, PB3-2, etc. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8, etc. The type-common variable display pattern may be, for example, variation pattern PB3-2, etc. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of the variable pattern PB3-2 compared to the variable patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32), and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 20-33 and 20-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying a concentration line at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentration line at a density D2), and the notification performance execution means is The notification effect can be performed by making the effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in Figures 20-34 and 20-35, a portion in which the decorative patterns on the left and right are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even if the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and if the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display can continue to be displayed for a predetermined period after the specified timing has passed (for example, as shown in Figure 20-44, when a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, a portion in which the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are no longer displayed on the image display device 5). With such a configuration, an increase in data volume is prevented, and the element of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result is increased, thereby improving interest in the variable display; the suggestive effect can increase the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can increase the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. If a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's disappointment at the temporary stop. This can improve interest in the game, and thereby improve the marketability of the gaming machine.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards, etc. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing for game control. 1 is a flowchart showing a special symbol process. A figure showing an example of determining the special chart display result. 13 is a flowchart showing a main processing for performance control. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. A diagram showing an example of determining the type of jackpot. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a miss fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reference table for when the result is a miss. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reference table for when the result is a miss. A figure showing a reference table at the time of a jackpot. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing a variation pattern type selection table. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. A figure showing an example of setting a performance pattern designation command. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. A figure showing a special period performance setting table. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. A diagram showing an example of settings at the start of a jackpot. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. A diagram showing an example of settings at the end of a jackpot. A diagram showing an example of settings at the end of a jackpot. A diagram showing an example of settings at the end of a jackpot. A flowchart showing the process of starting the change in the performance pattern. A flowchart showing the processing during change of the performance pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. A diagram showing an example of variable display control, an example of jackpot control, and an example of presentation control at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of variable display control. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of variable display control. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of variable display control. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of control of a presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the operation of a second movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a reserved memory of a jackpot, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a reserved memory of a losing result. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is an explanatory diagram of each performance period and performance content in the pseudo consecutive performance. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance decision process (for use when executing pseudo consecutive performances), and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of the preview performance to be executed. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not being executed), and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of the preview performances to be executed. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the temporary stop notification effect period decision ratio. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker. A figure showing the display mode of each image during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not stop. A figure showing the display mode of each image during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. This is an explanatory diagram of the change in visibility of the left and right decorative patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance period and the temporary stop notification performance period. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. 13 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device in a modified example. FIG. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the transparency of convergent lines and effect images in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 1, they are provided on the right side of the game area. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can each variably display special symbols as multiple types of special identification information. Special symbols are also called "special symbols." The variable display of special symbols is also called "special symbol game." Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using 7-segment LEDs or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a display of multiple types of special symbols that can be changed. For other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols, "variable display" also means a display of multiple types of symbols that can be changed. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply "change." Changes include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, and deforming, enlarging, or reducing one or more symbols. Changes may include a mode of displaying a certain symbol in a flashing manner. In the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of any symbol, a predetermined symbol is displayed as a stop display as a display result at the end. Stop display is also called derived display, or simply derived. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in a variable display is also called the final stop symbol or the final symbol. The final stop symbol in a special symbol game is also called the final special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol change time, which is the change time of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display time.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern." The special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game." A special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a normal symbol display 20 is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display 20 can perform variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are also called "normal symbols". The variable display of normal symbols is also called "normal symbol game". The normal symbol display 20 is configured using 7-segment LEDs and the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or a pattern in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stop symbol in the normal symbol game is also called a confirmed normal symbol. The display result of the normal symbol is also called a normal symbol display result. The execution time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol game is also called a normal symbol fluctuation time.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using any of the following devices, for example: an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (electro luminescence), a projector, and a screen. Alternatively, the image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various types of performance images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to performance images, and can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the performance pattern is performed in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game. The performance pattern is a display pattern showing numbers or the like, and is a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern or the normal pattern. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are provided, and the performance pattern is displayed in a variable manner, for example, by scrolling or updating the performance pattern in the vertical direction in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game. The special game and the variable display of the performance pattern executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display. The synchronization of the variable display may be such that the timing at which the pattern starts to change and the timing at which the change ends and the pattern is finally stopped and displayed are common timing for different types of patterns. The final stop pattern in the variable display of the performance pattern is also referred to as the determined performance pattern, determined decoration pattern, or determined decoration pattern. The variable display of the performance symbols is synchronized with the first and second special symbol games, so the variable display time of the performance symbols is the same as the special symbol fluctuation time.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed may be provided. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding to the variable display. The display area for displaying the pending display is also referred to as a pending display area. The display area for displaying the active display is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories. A first pending display 25A and a second pending display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B shown in FIG. 1. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of LEDs that are lit. The second reserved display 25B displays the second reserved memory number by the number of lit LEDs. A regular pattern reserved display 25C, which is composed of multiple LEDs, is provided above the regular pattern display 20 shown in FIG. 1. The regular pattern reserved display 25C displays the regular pattern reserved memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The regular pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number corresponding to the regular pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, there are provided a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B. The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning port that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three, are paid out, and the first start condition for executing the first special game can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second start winning port that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by the normal electric role solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 2 as a normal electric role. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-type role having a pair of movable wings, and when the normal electric role solenoid 81 is in an off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter. When the variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state, it is also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state. When the normal electric role solenoid 81 is in an on state, the movable wing piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning port is in an open state where the game ball can enter. When the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, it is also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state. When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example, three balls, are paid out, and the second start condition for executing the second special game can be established. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to one equipped with an electric tulip-type role, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

The entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also called the first start winning. The entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also called the second start winning. The game ball that enters the first start winning hole is detected by the first start winning hole switch 21A shown in FIG. 2. The game ball that enters the second start winning hole is detected by the second start winning hole switch 21B shown in FIG. 2. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the first reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the first special symbol display device 4A can variably display the special symbol as the first special symbol game. Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, the second reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display the special symbol as the second special symbol game.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 1, general winning openings 10 are provided in two locations on the lower left of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example 10, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first path and a second path are provided as flow paths for game balls to flow down. The first path is mainly provided in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left area of the image display device 5 is also called the left game area or the left game area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also called the right game area or the right game area. The left game area and the right game area may be divided, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area or the arrangement of the game nails. Firing a game ball toward the left game area to make it flow down the first path is also called a left hit. Firing a game ball toward the right game area to make it flow down the second path is also called a right hit. The first path is also called a left hit path. The second path is also called a right hit path. The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared.

In response to the operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball launching device, a game ball is launched from the ball launching device and launched into the game area. When a game ball launched into the game area is guided to the left game area and flows down the first path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide to the second path in the right game area. When a game ball launched into the game area is guided to the right game area and flows down the second path, it is guided, for example, along the arrangement of game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide to the first path in the left game area.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on a first path in the left-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on a second path in the right-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may also allow game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side play area have an easier time entering than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area.

The second path in the right game area is provided with a passing gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50. The passing gate 41 forms a passing area through which game balls can pass. Game balls that pass through the passing gate 41 are detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. When a game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the number of normal reserved memories can be added and updated, and variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 20 can be executed as a normal symbol game.

The special variable winning ball device 50 is a special electric device that forms a large winning port that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning port solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage with a passage width in the front and rear direction that allows the game ball to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on the front and back sides of the extended passage. In the center of the guide passage, a role entrance that serves as the large winning port is formed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front and rear directions is provided as a large winning port opening and closing member at a position where the large winning port can be opened and closed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passage is provided in the part of the guide passage where the large winning port is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the large prize opening solenoid 82 and can move forward and backward to open and close the role entrance which becomes the large prize opening. In the special variable prize ball device 50, the game ball that enters the inside from the large prize opening is detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a V prize area 51 which is a specific area is provided as a prize area through which the game ball can pass. In addition, inside the special variable prize ball device 50, a normal area different from the V prize area 51 is provided. At the top of the V prize area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member which can switch the V prize area 51 between an open state and a closed state is provided as a V prize opening opening and closing member. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V prize area 51. When the V prize area 51 is in an open state, the game ball can pass through it, and when it is in a closed state, the game ball cannot pass through it. Game balls that pass through the V winning area 51 are detected by the specific area switch 24. Game balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 pass through the normal area. Game balls that pass through the V winning area 51 and game balls that do not pass through the V winning area 51 but pass through the normal area are both detected by the discharge switch 26 and then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 50.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls, and numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes. Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting up the game effects are provided around the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball operation handle that is operated by a player or the like to launch gaming balls toward the playing area using the ball launching device. The ball operation handle is also called an operation knob. At a specified position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, there is provided a ball supply tray that holds gaming balls paid out as prize balls or gaming balls lent out by a specified ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. The ball supply tray is also called the upper tray. Below the upper tray, there is provided a prize ball storage tray where prize balls paid out when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A can be held by the player and tilted, and is provided with a trigger button that the player can push and pull. Operation of the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 2. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. Operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 2. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting the player's operation and other actions, but other detection means may also be used.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display device 20. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being executed, the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately, so the normal game based on the passage is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the normal game, when a specific normal symbol, such as a normal winning symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal winning". On the other hand, when a normal symbol other than the normal winning symbol, such as a normal losing symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal losing". In the case of "normal winning", an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period. At this time, the second starting winning port is opened.

When a game ball passes through and enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game can be started by the first special pattern display device 4A. When a game ball passes through and enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game can be started by the second special pattern display device 4B. Note that, during the period when the special pattern game is being executed or during the period when the game ball is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state, even if the game ball enters the start winning hole and a start winning occurs, the special pattern game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately, so the special pattern game based on the start winning is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the special pattern game, when a specific special pattern such as a big win pattern is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern becomes "big win". In contrast, when a predetermined special pattern, such as a small win pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "small win". Also, when a special pattern, such as a miss pattern, that is different from a big win pattern or a small win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "miss". Furthermore, when a special pattern, such as a time-saving pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time-saving". The special pattern may not include a time-saving pattern. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include "time-saving".

In the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot entry port formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time continues until the timing of the passage of a predetermined period, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot entry port reaches a predetermined number, whichever comes first. The predetermined period during which the jackpot entry port can be controlled to be in an open state is the upper limit period during which the jackpot entry port can be opened in one round, and is also called the open upper limit period. One cycle in which the jackpot entry port is in an open state in the jackpot game state is called a round or round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain prize balls by entering the game ball into the jackpot entry port. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit open period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

When the display result of the special pattern is a "jackpot", it includes multiple jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the jackpot entry port, such as the number of rounds and the maximum opening period, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, such as the normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state, are set to multiple different types, and a jackpot type is specified corresponding to each setting. The multiple jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, jackpot types that allow few prize balls to be obtained, or jackpot types that allow almost no prize balls to be obtained, or may include jackpot types with the same number of prize balls that can be obtained. Controlling to a jackpot game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "jackpot" is also called a pattern jackpot, a jackpot with a special pattern, a variable display jackpot, or a direct hit jackpot.

In the special game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to a small hit game state. In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small hit game state, the large winning opening may be opened in the same opening state as the large winning game state in some large hit types. The large winning opening may be opened in the same opening state by having the same number of openings and opening period. Alternatively, in the small hit game state, the large winning opening may be opened in an opening state different from the large hit game state. As with the large hit type, multiple small hit types may be included even when the display result of the special pattern becomes "small hit". The large hit type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the large winning opening in the small hit game state is also called the starting operation. When the special variable winning ball device 50 is in a small winning state, the special variable winning ball device 50's role entrance, which is the large winning opening, is opened, and when the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, the conditions for a big win are met, and control to the big win game state is possible. When the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 in a small winning game state, control to the big win game state based on the occurrence of a V winning is also called a small winning via big win.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in accordance with the jackpot type. In addition, in the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes "time-saving", the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to a time-saving state. The time-saving state is a game state in which the second special pattern game by the second special pattern display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special pattern game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second start winning hole than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning hole is also called base control. The base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. The base control in the time-saving state includes high base control. In addition to the high base control, the time-saving state may include medium base control. The medium base control is a base control that makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than the low base control, but makes it harder for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port than the high base control. The game state in which the medium base control is performed is also called the medium base state. The game state in which the high base control is performed is also called the high base state. The high base control is also called the high opening control.

In the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, it is possible for the time-saving pattern to be displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern. However, in the medium base state and the high base state, even if the time-saving pattern is displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern, base control based on the time-saving pattern is not performed, and new control to transition to the medium base state or the high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, it is possible to perform time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time more than in the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-shortening state.

The time-saving state is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, so it is included in the special states that are advantageous to players and different from the jackpot game state. When the game state is a probability-changing state, in addition to time-saving control, probability-changing control is possible in which the probability of the display result being a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. As a result, the probability-changing state is also called a probability-changing state. The probability-changing state is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols is improved and it is easy to become a "jackpot", so it is included in the special states that are advantageous to players and different from the jackpot game state. The time-saving state and probability-changing state continue until one of the predetermined end conditions, such as a predetermined number of special symbol games being played or control being made to the next jackpot game state, is met first. The end condition is that a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, also called a number-cut. The number-cut time-saving state is also called a number-cut time-cut. The number-cut probability-changing state is also called a number-cut probability-changing.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, predetermined states such as a small win game state, or special states such as a time-saving state or a probability change state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal win" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot" are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is performed without performing the specified recovery process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed.

The state in which the probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a probability variable state as a gaming state.

After the small win game state ends, there are cases where the game state is controlled to a big win game state based on the occurrence of a V win, and cases where a V win does not occur and the game state before the small win game state remains unchanged. However, when the display result of the special game becomes a "small win" and a specified number of special games are played in the number cutoff, the control of the time-saving state and the probability change state may end and the game state may return to the normal state. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may not include a small win game state as a game state. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include a "small win".

When a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is established, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition may be a condition that can be established when, after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special game becomes "time-saving," control to a new jackpot game state or time-saving state is not performed even if a specific number of variable displays are executed.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that liven up the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, and may be executed using any effect device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of the effect symbols. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the variable display of the effect symbols is started in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the determined special symbol that is the display result in the first special game or the second special game is stopped and displayed, the determined effect symbol that is the display result in the variable display of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. The determined effect symbol is composed of a combination of three effect symbols corresponding to the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the effect symbols, the display mode in the variable display of the effect symbols may become a reach mode. The reach mode is a mode in which the effect symbols that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute part of a jackpot combination and the fluctuation of the effect symbols that have not yet stopped continues. When the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols becomes a reach mode, it is said that a reach has been achieved.

When the variable display of the performance pattern becomes a reach state, a reach performance can be executed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach performance so that the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" varies when the performance state differs. The rate of a "jackpot" corresponding to the performance state is also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate. Reach performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, it may include a short reach and a long reach, which has a longer execution time than a short reach, corresponding to the execution time of the reach performance.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed performance pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a display result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", is displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", may be displayed stopped. In the case of a "non-probability jackpot" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "6", may be displayed stopped. A "non-probability jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd-numbered performance patterns are also called probability jackpot patterns. The even-numbered performance symbols are also called non-variable symbols or normal symbols. After a reach state occurs with a non-variable symbol, an advance performance may be executed that ultimately results in a "variable jackpot."

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed performance pattern that is a predetermined small win combination is displayed as a display result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing a number other than "7", may be displayed stopped on a predetermined valid line in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A common fixed performance pattern may be displayed stopped when the display result of the special game is a "big win" and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss", the display result may be displayed as a stop without the variable display of the performance symbols becoming a reach state. In this case, the fixed performance symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as a stop as the display result of the performance symbols. A display result in which the fixed performance symbol of the non-reach combination is displayed as a stop without becoming a reach state is also called a non-reach miss. When the display result of the special game is a "miss", the variable display of the performance symbols may become a reach state, and the display result may be displayed as a stop after the reach performance is executed. In this case, the display result of the performance symbols may be displayed as a stop with a fixed performance symbol of the reach combination that is not a big hit combination or a small hit combination. A display result in which the fixed performance symbol of the reach combination is displayed as a stop after becoming a reach state is also called a reach miss.

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include variable display-compatible displays such as reserved displays and active displays. In addition, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability can be executed while the effect pattern is variable displayed. The preview effect may include a variable preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display before execution whose execution is on hold. The look-ahead preview effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of a variable display-compatible display such as reserved displays and active displays to a mode different from normal.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to temporarily stop the performance symbols during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which one variable display appears as multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive performance may be set so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the number of times the variable display is resumed after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped is large than when the number of times the number is small. In the variable display of the performance symbols, there may be cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed before the reach state is reached, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the reach state is reached. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, it may be possible to execute the pseudo consecutive performance at multiple times.

During control of the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the number of rounds and an advancement performance to suggest or notify that the advantage of the jackpot gaming state will improve. During control of the small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of the small jackpot gaming state. By executing a common performance during control of the jackpot gaming state and during control of the small jackpot gaming state, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot gaming state.

In a non-playing state where a special game or the like is not being played and no game is progressing, a demonstration effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A demonstration effect image is also called a demo image. The display of a demo image is also called a demo display. The effect produced by the demo display is also called a customer waiting demo effect.

(Board configuration)
2, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game includes the execution of various games and transitions of game states, such as the execution of special games with reserved management, the execution of regular games with reserved management, big win game state, small win game state, time-saving state, and probability change state. The main board 11 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and can be configured to include a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. The ROM 101, the RAM 102, and a part or all of the random number circuit 104 may be configured to be external to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured to be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, start port switches such as a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM 101 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes table data constituting tables used for variation patterns, performance control commands, and various other settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 is a temporary storage device that provides a stack for saving work areas and data used for game control. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents of a part or all of the memory area so that they can be restored within a specified period even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a memory area that can store various data used for game control, such as a counter, a timer, a buffer, and a storage area for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a process corresponding to the program stored in the ROM 101. The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the progress of a game in an updateable manner. The random numbers used when controlling the progress of a game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103. The I/O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input, and an output port to which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the output port of I/O 105 may include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserve display device 25A, the second reserve display device 25B, the normal reserve display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric role solenoid 81, the large prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 transmits, as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game by the game control microcomputer 100, a presentation control command according to the progress of the game to the presentation control board 12 in a transmittable manner. The presentation control command is a command that specifies or notifies the progress of the game. The presentation control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control command may include commands that specify various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display result of the special game, the type of win, and the variation pattern, commands that specify the status of the game, such as the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, and the game status, and commands that specify the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and controlling the performance based on the received performance control commands. The performances that can be controlled by the performance control board 12 include various performances according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also various notifications such as error notifications and notifications of power outage recovery. The performance control board 12 comprises a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of performance together with the display control unit 123. This processing is for implementing the various functions of the performance control board 12, and includes determining the performance to be executed. The performance control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data from various tables, and also uses the RAM 122 as its main memory. The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of mainly display-related effects based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates the on/off state of the game effect lamp 9. The supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal enables the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on or off of the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to a motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the execution of various performances. The random numbers used when controlling the execution of performances are also called performance random numbers. The performance random numbers may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the performance control CPU 120. The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 may include an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14.

The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on a sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and turns the game effect lamp 9 on or off in the manner designated by the lamp signal. In this way, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on and off of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on a signal from the display control unit 123. Note that the control of the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp, such as the supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, and the control of the movable body 32, such as the supply of a signal to operate the movable body 32, may be performed in part or in whole by the performance control CPU 120. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or, unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, DC 12V or DC 5V, etc.). The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending the power supply by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 takes in a reset signal, a power off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power-off reference time or longer. The clear signal is turned on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process.

Figure 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the game control main process shown in Figure 3 is started, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). As a result, other processes will not be executed until interrupts are permitted. Next, the built-in device register is set (step S2). In setting the built-in device register, for example, a built-in device register setting table is used to store the built-in device register setting value at the specified built-in device address. The built-in device register may be, for example, a PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) as a timer counter that is a timer circuit, a random number circuit 104, an input port of the I/O 105, a serial communication circuit, an RWM access control circuit, or the like, provided in correspondence with various circuits and electronic components. In addition, the stack pointer may be initially set, an interrupt vector may be set, and so on.

Next, the RWM check process (step S3) is executed to determine whether or not a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S4). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the storage contents in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM are normal. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S4 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM for game control. The RWM check process in step S3 includes a checksum calculation process, and the checksum data obtained as a result of the process is compared with the storage data in the checksum buffer, and if the two data match, it is determined that the storage contents in the RAM 102 are normal. In step S4, it is possible to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and data errors, etc., using the RWM check process in step S3.

When the recovery condition is met (Step S4; Yes), recovery settings are made. The recovery settings include the specification of a backup command transmission table (Step S5) and a backup setting table (Step S6). The backup command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a power outage recovery specification command to the performance control board 12, which specifies that recovery has been performed using backup data. The backup setting table includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when recovery has been performed using backup data. To specify a table, a value corresponding to the top address of the table stored in ROM 101 is stored in a general-purpose pointer or table pointer. The same applies to other tables.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S4; No), the initialization setting is performed. The initialization setting includes the RWM initial setting process (step S7), the designation of the initialization command transmission table (step S8), and the designation of the initialization setting table (step S9). The RWM initial setting process includes a process of initializing the work area by storing clear data in a predetermined area that becomes the work area in the RAM 102. The initialization command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a power-on designation command that designates that the initial setting has been performed at the time of power-on to the performance control board 12. The initialization setting table includes table data used for the initial setting of the work area when the initial setting has been performed at the time of power-on. For example, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the count value of the specific count counter to the specific count initial value. The initialization setting table also includes table data for setting the storage value of the specific count command buffer to the specific count command upper limit value. The specific number of times is the number of times the variable display is executed, which is the time-saving condition that transitions the gaming state from the normal state to the time-saving state when a period of time continues in which the gaming state is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a time-saving state.

Then, command set processing (step S10) and data set processing (step S11) are executed. The command set processing includes a process for sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12 by storing command data specified in the command transmission table in the serial communication data register. The data set processing includes a process for storing a specified value at an address indicated by the table data using a data setting table specified by a pointer, and a process for clearing the memory contents of the address indicated by the table data.

Then, after executing the wait process (step S12), a specific number of times command transmission process (step S13) is executed. The wait process waits until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, thereby ensuring that sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be started. The specific number of times command process is a process for sending a performance control command that specifies the count value of the specific number of times counter to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific number of times counter is provided at a predetermined address in RAM 102, and it is sufficient that it is capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of times the variable display has been executed reaches a specific number corresponding to the time-saving condition.

Following the specific number of command transmission processes in step S13, interrupt initial settings (step S14) are performed, the PTC counter output value is set so that a regular timer interrupt occurs at a predetermined time interval, for example, every 4 milliseconds, and loop processing begins. In this loop processing, interrupt prohibition (step S15), random number update processing for determining initial value (step S16), and interrupt permission (step S17) are repeatedly executed. Thereafter, each time an interrupt request signal is sent from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 becomes able to execute timer interrupt processing. This enables the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals, for example, every 4 milliseconds.

Figure 4 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. The CPU 103 can execute the game control timer interrupt process by receiving an interrupt request signal from the PTC and accepting the interrupt request. The game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 4 (A) includes a power cut process (step S21), a switch process (step S22), a main side error process (step S23), a game random number update process (step S24), a special symbol process process (step S25), a normal symbol process process (step S26), an information output process (step S27), a prize ball process (step S28), and a main side display control process (step S29).

The power-off process in step S21 includes a process of checking the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 and judging whether a power-off has occurred. When a power-off occurs, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the checksum data is set in the checksum buffer, after which settings for when the power-off occurs, such as prohibiting RWM access, are performed. The switch process in step S22 includes a process of judging whether a detection signal has been received from various switches input via the switch circuit 110, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The reception result of the detection signal is set in the switch-on buffer. The main-side error process in step S23 includes a process of diagnosing an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1 and, if necessary, issuing a warning according to the diagnosis result. The game random number update process in step S24 includes a process of updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

Figure 4 (B) shows an example of a random number for gaming. The random numbers for gaming include a random number MR1 for determining a special symbol, a random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol, a random number MR3 for determining an initial value of MR2, a random number MR4 for selecting a variation pattern type, a random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern, a random number MR6 for determining a winning normal symbol, and a random number MR7 for determining an initial value of MR6. The random number MR1 for determining a special symbol is used when determining the display result of a special symbol, such as whether or not the display result of a special symbol is a "big win" or whether or not the display result of a special symbol is a "small win". The random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol is used when selecting a confirmed special symbol from a plurality of special symbols, such as a big win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "big win" or a small win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "small win". The random number MR3 for determining the MR2 initial value is used to create the initial value of the random number MR2. The random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is used to select the variation pattern type of the special pattern. The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. The random number MR6 for determining the normal pattern hit is used when determining the display result of the normal pattern, that is, whether or not the display result of the normal pattern is a "normal hit". The random number MR7 for determining the MR6 initial value is used to create the initial value of the random number MR6. The random number MR3 for determining the MR2 initial value and the random number MR7 for determining the MR6 initial value may be updated not only in the game random number update process of step S24, but also in the initial value determination random number update process of step S16 shown in FIG. 3.

The variation pattern is determined by using the value of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern, from among one or more variation patterns included in the variation pattern type selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the pattern to be used in the current variable display. The variation pattern specifies various variable setting items including the special pattern variation time, which is the execution time of the special pattern game, the state of the variable display of the performance pattern, and the performance content during the variable display of the performance pattern. The special pattern variation time is also the execution time for the variable display of the performance pattern. The state of the variable display of the performance pattern includes the presence or absence of a reach. The performance content during the variable display of the performance pattern includes the type of reach performance. The variation pattern is also called a variable display pattern. The variation pattern type is a group that includes one or more variation patterns that are classified in advance based on, for example, the performance state during the variable display of the performance pattern.

The special symbol process processing in step S25 shown in FIG. 4(A) includes processing related to the variable display of the special symbol and the game state, such as the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, and the control of the game state. The normal symbol process processing in step S26 includes processing related to the variable display of the normal symbol and the state control of the second start winning port, such as the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal hit". The information output processing in step S27 sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information such as big win information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, for example. The big win information indicates the number of big wins, etc. The start information indicates the number of start wins, etc. The probability fluctuation information indicates the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc. The prize ball processing in step S28 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter addition process uses a prize ball number table to determine whether the switch is on, and when on is detected, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects a process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the prize balls based on the detection of the game ball so that they can be paid out. The main side display control process in step S29 includes a display setting for the first special pattern and a display setting for the second special pattern. The display setting for the first special pattern is a setting for controlling the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A so that it can be updated by executing the special pattern control process. The display setting for the second special pattern is a setting for controlling the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B so that it can be updated by executing the special pattern control process.

5(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4(A) as the special symbol process. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning judgment process (step S101). The start winning judgment process includes a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the reserved memory number. When the occurrence of a start winning is detected, if the reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, a random number value used to determine the display result, the winning type, the variation pattern, etc. is extracted. The extracted random number value is stored as reserved information. In addition, a process of predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After updating the storage of the reserved information and the reserved memory number, a command setting is performed to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. With such a command setting, the performance control command at the time of the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the start winning determination process of step S101, the CPU 103 reads out the special symbol process code stored in a specified address in the RAM 102 (step S102). The special symbol process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0B[H] and is also called the special symbol process code. [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. The CPU 103 selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code (step S103). This makes it possible to control the progress of the game regarding the variable display of the special symbol.

Figure 5 (B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to a special symbol process code in the special symbol process processing. The special symbol process processing includes, as processing that can be executed in response to a special symbol process code, a normal special symbol process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 00 [H], a special symbol change process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 01 [H], a special symbol stop process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 02 [H], a pre-small win opening process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 03 [H], a small win opening process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 04 [H], and a special symbol stop process corresponding to a special symbol process code of 05 [H]. It includes a small win post-opening process corresponding to the special chart process code 06 [H], a small win discharge ball waiting process corresponding to the special chart process code 07 [H], a large win end process corresponding to the special chart process code 08 [H], a large win opening pre-opening process corresponding to the special chart process code 09 [H], a large win opening post-opening process corresponding to the special chart process code 0A [H], and a large win end process corresponding to the special chart process code 0B [H].

The normal special symbol processing includes a process capable of determining whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reserved information. The normal special symbol processing includes a process capable of determining whether the display result of the special symbol is a "big win" or a "small win", and further whether it is a "time reduction" based on the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol. The normal special symbol processing includes a process for determining the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the special symbol in response to the determination of the display result. The normal special symbol processing includes a process for determining the variable pattern. Thus, in the normal special symbol processing, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, various determinations and decisions (pre-determinations) regarding the variable display are made before the display result is derived and displayed, and the special symbol process code is updated to 01 [H].

When making various judgments and decisions based on random number values, the CPU 103 reads out and references various tables from ROM 101. The same applies to other judgments and decisions using random number values on the main board 11. Even if random number values are not used, the necessary tables may be read out and referenced from ROM 101 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc. On the performance control board 12, it is sufficient to read out and reference various tables from ROM 121 to make various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

In the normal special symbol processing, the special symbol 2 priority consumption control may be performed, in which the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol. Alternatively, in the normal special symbol processing, the winning order consumption control may be performed, in which the start conditions for the special symbol game are established in accordance with the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning port and the second start winning port.

The special pattern change process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the special pattern starts changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, and judging whether the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed. When the special pattern change time has elapsed, a pattern stop time for stopping the display of the confirmed special pattern is set, the count values of various counters are updated, and the special pattern process code is updated to 02 [H]. The special pattern stop process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the special pattern stops changing on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B, and judging whether the pattern stop time set in the special pattern change process has elapsed. When the pattern stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are made according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the special pattern process code is updated to 08 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the special pattern process code is updated to 03 [H]. If the display result of the variable display is "time-saving" or "miss," the special chart process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H]. Also, if the display result of the variable display is "jackpot," a setting corresponding to the start of a jackpot game state is made. If the display result of the variable display is "small jackpot," a setting corresponding to the start of a small jackpot game state is made. If the display result of the variable display is "time-saving," a setting is made to control the game state to a time-saving state.

The small win pre-opening process performs settings to open the large prize opening in the small win game state based on the display result of the variable display being "small win", and updates the special chart process code to 04 [H]. The small win opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the large prize opening was opened in the small win game state and determining whether the small win opening time has elapsed. If the small win opening time has elapsed, the special chart process code is updated to 05 [H] along with settings to close the large prize opening. The small win post-opening process performs a prize winning detection for the large prize opening in the small win game state, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, updates the special chart process code to 06 [H]. The small win discharge ball waiting process includes a process of setting a large prize opening discharge ball error, determining whether the V prize area 51 has passed, and determining whether the discharge of the large prize opening has been completed. When it is determined that the large prize opening has been discharged, the special prize process code is updated to 07 [H] along with the settings before the small prize ends. The small prize end process includes a process for determining whether or not the V prize area 51 has been passed using the specific area passing flag. When a game ball has passed through the V prize area 51, the specific area passing flag is set to a designated value 01 [H] corresponding to the on state. When the specific area passing flag is on, the special prize process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the start of the large prize. When the specific area flag is off, the special prize process code is cleared along with the end of the small prize and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

The pre-opening process of the large prize opening performs settings to control the large prize opening to an open state, such as updating the large prize opening count counter and settings for when the large prize opening is opened, including the operation settings of the large prize opening, and updates the special chart process code to 09 [H]. The process during the opening of the large prize opening measures the time elapsed since the large prize opening was opened in the jackpot game state, detects winning at the large prize opening, and updates the special chart process code to 0A [H] along with settings to close the large prize opening when the maximum number of winning balls at the large prize opening is reached or when the opening time for the jackpot has elapsed. The post-opening process of the large prize opening includes a process of determining the end of the time after the large prize opening is opened after setting the large prize opening ejection ball mismatch error, and determining the count value of the large prize opening opening count counter when it is determined that the opening has ended. If the count value of the large prize opening counter is less than the maximum large prize opening opening count, the special chart process code is updated to 08 [H], and the next round can be started. If the count value of the large prize opening counter is the maximum large prize opening opening count, the special chart process code is updated to 0B [H] along with the settings at the end of the opening, including the setting of the jackpot end presentation time. The jackpot end process includes a process for determining whether the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed. If the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed, the special chart process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] along with the jackpot end settings, including the game state setting at the end of the jackpot.

The special pattern normal processing of the special pattern process includes a special pattern big win judgment process and a special pattern small win judgment process. The special pattern normal processing may also include a special pattern time-saving judgment process. In these judgment processes, a special pattern judgment value check is performed using the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 read from the special pattern judgment buffer to see which judgment range the value is included in. For example, if the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 is included in the big win judgment range, the special pattern big win judgment process judges that the display result of the special pattern is a "big win". Also, if the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 is included in the small win judgment range, the special pattern small win judgment process judges that the display result of the special pattern is a "small win". If the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 is included in the time-saving judgment range, the special pattern time-saving judgment process may judge that the display result of the special pattern is a "time-saving".

Figure 6 shows an example of the determination of the special symbol display result, which is the display result of the special symbol. The start hole winning designation value is set to "1" in the case of a first start winning caused by a game ball entering the first start winning hole, and is set to "2" in the case of a second start winning caused by a game ball entering the second start winning hole. In other words, when the start hole winning designation value is "1", a first special symbol game is executed, which is a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, when the start hole winning designation value is "2", a second special symbol game is executed, which is a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol big win judgment process, the special symbol small win judgment process, and the special symbol time-saving judgment process, the MR1 judgment value is set to be compared with the value of the random number MR1 so that the special symbol display result is determined to be either a "big win", a "small win", a "time-saving", or a "miss" depending on whether the start-port winning designation value is "1" or "2". The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "big win" is also called the big win judgment value. The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win" is also called the small win judgment value. The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "time-saving" is also called the time-saving judgment value. The big win probability based on the setting of the big win judgment value indicates the proportion of big wins due to the special symbol game. The small win probability based on the setting of the small win judgment value indicates the proportion of small wins due to the special symbol game. The time-saving probability based on the setting of the time-saving judgment value indicates the proportion of base control that can be changed by the special symbol game.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, a description will be given of the main operations of the performance control board 12. In the performance control board 12, when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 17 or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process.

Figure 7 is a flowchart showing the main performance control process executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the performance control board 12. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 7 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes an initialization process (step S71). The initialization process includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and register settings for the timer circuit mounted on the performance control board 12. At this time, an initial operation control process (step S72) is executed. The initial operation control process includes control for performing initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check. Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time, such as 2 milliseconds, elapses based on the register settings for the timer circuit. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and standby is performed.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and a command analysis process (step S75) is executed. The command analysis process includes, for example, reading out various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer, and then performing processing such as setting and control corresponding to the read presentation control command. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on, so that which presentation control command was received or the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. When the presentation control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to that game state.

After executing the command analysis process, the performance control process (step S76) is executed. The performance control process includes control of various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. The control contents of the performance operation using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11. Following the performance control process, the performance random number update process (step S77) is executed. The performance random number update process updates at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 8 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 shown in Figure 7 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead performance setting process (step S151). The look-ahead performance setting process includes, for example, processing such as judging, deciding, and setting regarding the execution of a look-ahead preview performance based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. It also includes processing for displaying a hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the look-ahead performance setting process, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the performance process code stored in a specified address in the RAM 122 (step S152). The performance process code can be updated to any value between 00 [H] and 0A [H], and is also called the performance control process code. The performance control CPU 120 selects and executes the process that corresponds to the read value of the performance process code (step S153). This makes it possible to control the execution of the performance, including the variable display of the performance patterns.

Figure 8 (B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to the presentation process code in the presentation control process processing. The presentation control process processing includes, as processing that can be executed in response to the presentation process code, a variation pattern command waiting process corresponding to the presentation process code 00 [H], a presentation pattern variation start process corresponding to the presentation process code 01 [H], a presentation pattern variation initiation process corresponding to the presentation process code 02 [H], a presentation pattern variation stop process corresponding to the presentation process code 03 [H], a small win display process corresponding to the presentation process code 04 [H], a small win open process corresponding to the presentation process code 05 [H], a small win end presentation process corresponding to the presentation process code 06 [H], a big win display process corresponding to the presentation process code 07 [H], a round process corresponding to the presentation process code 08 [H], a round post process corresponding to the presentation process code 09 [H], and a big win end presentation process corresponding to the presentation process code 0A [H].

The waiting process for receiving a variation pattern command includes a process capable of determining whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has been received. For example, the presence or absence of reception can be determined by whether or not a variation pattern designation command reception flag set in the command analysis process is on. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the performance process code is updated to 01 [H]. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, control of the demo display is performed. The performance pattern change start process includes a process for controlling so that a variation time performance corresponding to a special game is started. For example, in response to the received variation pattern command, a performance pattern for a variation time performance is selected, and the timing value of a performance process timer that measures the performance execution time is started to be updated, and the performance process code is updated to 02 [H]. The performance pattern change process includes a process for controlling the switching timing of each performance element that constitutes the performance pattern, and a process for determining whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the timing value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 03 [H]. The performance pattern change stop process includes a process for controlling the end of the performance during change based on the establishment of the end condition of the performance during change, such as the elapse of the performance execution time or the reception of a performance pattern determination command, and for controlling the display of the performance result corresponding to the determined special pattern. Then, the performance process code is updated and various settings are made according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the performance process code is updated to 07 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the performance process code is updated to 04 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time reduction" or "miss", the performance process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

The small win display process includes a setting process for performing a small win fanfare performance when a small win occurs. The small win fanfare performance includes a small win display in which a performance image that notifies the occurrence of a small win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the small win fanfare performance time has elapsed. When the small win fanfare performance time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 05 [H] along with the end control of the small win fanfare performance. The small win open processing performs settings for performing a small win open performance in response to the opening of the large winning hole in the small win game state, and updates the performance process code to 06 [H]. The small win end performance processing includes a process for controlling the display of a performance image that notifies the end of the small win game state on the screen of the image display device 5 so that it can be displayed. In addition, in the small win game state, when the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 24 and it is determined that a V win has occurred, the execution control of the V win performance that notifies the occurrence of a V win is performed. If a V win occurs during a small win game state, the presentation process code is updated to 07 [H]. If a V win does not occur during a small win game state, the presentation process code is cleared and updated to the initial value, 00 [H].

The jackpot display process includes a setting process for performing a fanfare effect when a jackpot occurs. The fanfare effect includes a jackpot display in which an effect image that notifies the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the fanfare effect time has elapsed. When the fanfare effect time has elapsed, the effect process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the end control of the fanfare effect. The round processing includes display settings during the round in the jackpot game state. When the round end condition is met, if it is not the end of the final round, the effect process code is updated to 09 [H], and if it is the end of the final round, the effect process code is updated to 0A [H]. The round post-processing includes display settings between rounds in the jackpot game state. Then, when the round start condition is met, the effect process code is updated to 08 [H]. The jackpot end effect includes a process for controlling the display of an effect image that notifies the end of the jackpot game state on the screen of the image display device 5 so that it can be displayed. After that, when the time to announce the end of the jackpot has elapsed, the presentation process code is cleared and updated to its initial value, 00 [H].

(Modification of the basic explanation)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operation in the basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and may have some of the configurations described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. In the above embodiment, when a subordinate concept is described, an invention of a superordinate concept using a homologous or similar matter, or an invention of a superordinate concept using a common property, is included as the present invention, and may have some of the structures and characteristics described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning prize, or it may be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of a winning prize.

The display during the variable display of the special pattern may be only one type of pattern, such as a symbol indicating "-", and the variable display may be such that this pattern is repeatedly displayed and turned off. One type of pattern may be displayed during the variable display, and this pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, the display result may be a non-display state in which the symbol indicating "-" is not displayed, and no special pattern is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to change the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in response to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate may be changed by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value. As a specific example, the set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the set value, the ball payout rate may also change depending on the set value. The probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. During execution of the variable display, a setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate may be executed. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion performance may suggest the probability of a jackpot through any performance, and may also be able to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention relating to gaming machines is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but can also be applied to slot machines as appropriate. A slot machine can execute a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of an operating lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of a stop button, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player if a specific combination of symbols is formed. In a slot machine, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may include one or more of the so-called bonuses, such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

The programs and data for implementing various controls, including the progress of the game and the execution of the performance, may be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, or may be distributed and provided by being installed in advance in a storage device of the computer device. In addition, the machine may be provided with a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line, etc., and may distribute and provide the programs and data by downloading them from the external device. The execution form of the game and performance may also be executable by mounting a removable recording medium, or may be executable by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via a communication line, etc. in an internal memory, or may be executable directly using the hardware resources of an external device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., or may be executable by exchanging data with another computer device, etc., via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as the decision percentage of a process or data, or the execution percentage of a performance, expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" may include the case where one is a percentage of "0%" or "100%". For example, for one decision result or execution content, it may include the case where there is no decision or execution at a percentage of "0%", or the case where there is always a decision or execution at a percentage of "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 23AK)
The pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic section 23AK is controlled so that the display result of the special symbol is either a "miss" or a "jackpot", but is not a "small win" or a "time-saving". In addition, the game state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the high probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined high probability control condition. The high probability state is controlled to continue until a predetermined high probability end condition is established, such as the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays or the start of the next high probability state.

When in a jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 50's special winning opening, which is the large winning opening, is opened, and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, and based on this, the special variable control condition for entering the special variable state after the jackpot game state ends is established. In other words, the location where the specific area switch 24 is installed is set as a specific area, and the special variable control condition can be established based on the game ball passing through this specific area.

Based on the establishment of such probability variable control conditions, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state is controlled to a high probability high base state. The high probability high base state has a higher probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the probability variable control compared to the normal state, and the high base control makes it easier to execute variable display compared to the normal state. Based on the non-establishment of the probability variable control conditions, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the state is controlled to a low probability high base state. The low probability high base state has the same probability of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state as the normal state, and the high base control makes it easier to execute variable display compared to the normal state.

Figure 9-1 is a flow chart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. In normal special symbol processing, CPU 103 determines whether the total reserved memory count is "0" or not (step AKS101). The total reserved memory count is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count, and indicates the number of reserved information stored for variable display that has not yet started. In step AKS101, for example, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is "0", it is determined that the total reserved memory count is "0". The total reserved memory counter is provided at a specified address in RAM 102, and it is sufficient that it is capable of counting the total reserved memory count.

When the total reserved memory number is other than "0" in response to step AKS101 (step AKS101; No), the total reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS102). At this time, data indicating the start port winning designated value may be set. For example, when the second reserved memory number is other than "0", the start port winning designated value is set to "2" and the second reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. In contrast, when the second reserved memory number is "0", the start port winning designated value is set to "1" and the first reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. If the total reserved memory number is other than "0" in step AKS101, at least one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is other than "0". When setting the data indicating the start port winning designated value, it is sufficient to first determine whether the second reserved memory number is other than "0" so that the special game using the second special symbol can be executed with priority over the special game using the first special symbol.

Following step AKS102, a special symbol determination control table is specified (step AKS103). The special symbol determination control table stores various information used to control the determination of special symbols. For example, the special symbol determination control table specifies the addresses of a special symbol determination buffer, a winning symbol buffer, a special symbol buffer, and the like. The special symbol determination buffer stores data indicating the random number MR1 for special symbol determination among the game random numbers extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning by the start winning determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5 (A). The winning symbol buffer stores data indicating the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol among the game random numbers extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning. The special symbol buffer stores data indicating a confirmed special symbol. The confirmed special symbol is the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game.

The special symbol determination control table may include a first special symbol determination control table corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol determination control table corresponding to the second special symbol. In step AKS103, after the second special symbol determination control table is specified, it may be determined whether the start port winning designation value is "1". If the start port winning designation value is "1", the first special symbol determination control table may be re-specified. The second special symbol determination control table may be specified by storing a value corresponding to the top address of the second special symbol determination control table in the HL register that serves as a pointer. When the first special symbol determination control table is re-specified, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing a value corresponding to the top address of the first special symbol determination control table in the HL register that serves as a pointer. In this way, by specifying the second special symbol determination control table and then resetting the first special symbol determination control table when the start port winning determination value is "1", if the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the program capacity of the storage command used for table setting can be reduced, improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, if the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the processing by the branch command can be simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage, and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

After step AKS103, the memory contents of the special symbol corresponding buffer are shifted (step AKS104). The special symbol corresponding buffer may include a buffer for determining a special symbol and a buffer for a winning symbol, as well as a buffer for selecting a variation pattern type and a buffer for a variation pattern, and may be a buffer for storing random numbers in which data indicating a game random number extracted based on the occurrence of a start winning is stored. In step AKS104, for example, after setting the transfer destination address, transfer source address, and number of transfers, a block transfer command is executed to transfer and shift the memory contents in each storage area of the special symbol corresponding buffer by one unit at a time to the previous storage area.

Following step AKS104, the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol is read (step AKS105). Then, a special symbol jackpot determination (step AKS106) and special symbol information setting (step AKS107) are performed. In this embodiment, the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined to be either a "jackpot" or a "miss," and is not determined to be a "small hit" or a "time reduction."

The special symbol jackpot determination in step AKS106 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS105 with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot". The determination of whether or not the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is a determination of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state. Then, when the special symbol jackpot determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", the jackpot designated value 01 [H] is set in the hit flag. Note that the hit flag is set to the initial value 00 [H] when the special symbol normal processing is executed.

The special symbol information setting in step AKS107 includes setting the type of jackpot and the jackpot symbol when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", and setting the miss symbol when the special symbol display result is a "miss". Data indicating the type of jackpot is stored in the jackpot type buffer. Data indicating the confirmed special symbol, such as a jackpot symbol or a miss symbol, is stored in the special symbol buffer. The special symbol buffer includes a first special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second special symbol buffer corresponding to the second special symbol. In step AKS107, the address of the first special symbol buffer or the second special symbol buffer can be identified by referring to the special symbol determination control table specified in step AKS103.

After step AKS107, post-determination data setting (step AKS108) and variable pattern setting processing (step AKS109) are executed, and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. The post-determination data setting in step AKS108 includes designating a post-determination work setting table and executing data set processing. When designating the post-determination work setting table, the address of the post-determination work setting table corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be specified by referring to the special symbol determination control table designated in step AKS103. The data set processing in step AKS109 may include a data clearing process for clearing the special symbol determination buffer and the winning symbol buffer and initializing the stored values.

When the total number of reserved memories is "0" corresponding to step AKS101 (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (step AKS110). The demo display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration display is being executed. When the demo display flag is on (step AKS110; Yes), the normal special symbol processing ends. In contrast, when the demo display flag is off (step AKS110; No), the demo display flag is set to the on state (step AKS111), and the transmission setting of the standby command is performed (step AKS112), and the normal special symbol processing ends. The transmission setting of step AKS112 includes the specification of the standby command transmission table and the command set processing. The standby command transmission table may include table data for transmitting the background specification command and the customer waiting demo command.

Figure 9-2 shows a jackpot type determination example AKD01. In the normal special pattern processing shown in Figure 9-1, in the special pattern information setting of step AKS107, when the special pattern display result is "jackpot", the jackpot type is set using the value of the random number for jackpot type determination. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate a jackpot designated value, data indicating the value of the random number for jackpot type determination is read out, and a jackpot type determination table is selected corresponding to the start port winning designated value, the probability variable flag, and the time-saving flag. The jackpot type determination table may be prepared in advance in correspondence with the cases where the start port winning designated value is "1" and "2", where the probability variable flag is on and off, where the time-saving flag is on and off, etc. The probability variable flag is set to the on state corresponding to the high probability state as the probability variable state, and the time-saving flag is set to the on state corresponding to the high base state as the time-saving state. The jackpot type determination table is composed of table data including judgment value data. The judgment value data of the jackpot type determination table indicates the allocation judgment value for each jackpot type that can be determined, and multiple allocation judgment values corresponding to multiple jackpot types can be set. In the special pattern information setting of step AKS107, when the special pattern display result is "jackpot", the jackpot type may be determined using a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a special pattern that will be the jackpot pattern may be selected using a random number MR2 for selecting a winning pattern. For example, a loop process that can sequentially compare the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type with multiple allocation judgment values indicated in the judgment value data may be executed, and when the value of the random number is equal to or less than the allocation judgment value, the jackpot type corresponding to the allocation judgment value may be determined. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined and the jackpot pattern may be selected using the random number MR2 for selecting a winning pattern.

In the jackpot game state, there are multiple jackpot types that have the same or different settings for the upper limit time during which the distribution member that becomes the V winning port opening and closing member opens the V winning area 51 during the execution of a specific round. As an example, the multiple jackpot types can be classified into a case where the jackpot type is "normal" and a case where the jackpot type is "probability change". Among these, when the jackpot type is "normal", the upper limit time for opening the V winning area 51 is set to 50 milliseconds (ms). In contrast, when the jackpot type is "probability change", the upper limit time for opening the V winning area 51 is set to 29,500 milliseconds. Therefore, when the jackpot type is "normal", the possibility of the game ball passing (entering) the V winning area 51 is low, and the probability change control condition for entering the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state is unlikely to be established. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "probability variable," there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass through (enter) the V winning area 51, and the probability variable control conditions for entering the probability variable state after the jackpot game state ends are likely to be met.

In this embodiment, the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 are included as the jackpot type when the jackpot type is "normal", and the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 are included as the jackpot type when the jackpot type is "probable". In the determination example AKD01, when the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2", it is possible to determine one of multiple jackpot types at a predetermined ratio in response to the presence or absence of probable control in the probable state, the presence or absence of high base control in the time-saving state, etc. Here, when the high base control is "not performed", the jackpot type is determined at a different ratio when the probable control is "not performed" or "present". In contrast, when the high base control is "present", the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio when the probable control is "not performed" or "present". In addition, when the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2", it is possible to determine some or all of the jackpot types that are different.

In the example AKD01, when both the probability variable control and the high base control are "none", if the starting hole winning designation value is "1", the jackpot type can be determined to be either NA01-NA04 or KA01-KA06, while if the starting hole winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type can be determined to be either NA05-NA07 or KA07-KA10. Therefore, when both the probability variable control and the high base control are "none", all different jackpot types can be determined depending on whether the starting hole winning designation value is "1" or "2". Also, when the probability variable control is "on" and the high base control is "off", if the starting port winning designation value is "1", the jackpot type can be determined to be one of NA02, NA04, or KA02, KA04 to KA06, while when the starting port winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type can be determined to be one of NA05 to NA07, or KA07 to KA10. Therefore, when the probability variable control is "on" and the high base control is "off", if the starting port winning designation value is "1" or "2", all different jackpot types can be determined. Alternatively, when high base control is "enabled," if the starting port winning designation value is "1," it is possible to determine either the jackpot type NA08, or the jackpot type KA11, or KA15, while if the starting port winning designation value is "2," it is possible to determine either the jackpot type NA09-NA11, or the jackpot type KA12-KA15. In this way, when high base control is "enabled," it is possible to determine the common jackpot type KA15 when the starting port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2." Therefore, when high base control is "enabled," it is possible to determine a partially different jackpot type when the starting port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2."

In the determination example AKD01, when the start port winning designation value is "1", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variable control or the presence or absence of the high base control, the jackpot type is determined to be included in "normal" at a determination rate of 100/200, i.e., 50% of the time, and the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variable" at a determination rate of 100/200, i.e., 50% of the time. Also, when the start port winning designation value is "2", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variable control or the presence or absence of the high base control, the jackpot type is determined to be included in "normal" at a determination rate of 12/200, i.e., 6% of the time, and the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variable" at a determination rate of 188/200, i.e., 94% of the time. In this way, when the start port winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type is determined to be included in "probability variable" at a higher rate than when the start port winning designation value is "1". Therefore, when the special symbol display result is "jackpot" in a special symbol game using the second special symbol and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be controlled to a high probability state at a higher rate than when the special symbol display result is "jackpot" in a special symbol game using the first special symbol and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state.

When the starting port winning designation value is "1", the jackpot type determination table has multiple sections in the order of a first section with a determination ratio of 11/200, a second section with a determination ratio of 44/200, a third section with a determination ratio of 11/200, and a fourth section with a determination ratio of 34/200, corresponding to the determinable jackpot types included in "normal", regardless of the presence or absence of special rate control or high base control, and multiple sections in the order of a fifth section with a determination ratio of 12/200, a sixth section with a determination ratio of 7/200, a seventh section with a determination ratio of 12/200, an eighth section with a determination ratio of 19/200, a ninth section with a determination ratio of 15/200, and a tenth section with a determination ratio of 35/200, corresponding to the determinable jackpot types included in "special rate". The determination value data is set to indicate multiple allocation determination values. In addition, when the starting gate winning designation value is "2", the jackpot type determination table has multiple sections in the order of the first section with a determination ratio of 2/200, the second section with 2/200, the third section with 2/200, the fourth section with 2/200, the fifth section with 1/200, the sixth section with 1/200, and the seventh section with 2/200, in accordance with the determinable jackpot types included in "normal", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation control or the presence or absence of the high base control, and the determination value data indicating multiple allocation determination values is set so as to have multiple sections in the order of the eighth section with a determination ratio of 62/200, the ninth section with 50/200, the tenth section with 62/200, and the eleventh section with 14/200, in accordance with the determinable jackpot types included in "probability variation".

The jackpot type determination table has multiple divisions with common determination ratios corresponding to the start port winning designation values of "1" and "2", regardless of the presence or absence of special probability control or high base control, while judgment value data indicating multiple allocation judgment values is set so that the allocation of each division to the jackpot type that is the determination result differs depending on the presence or absence of special probability control or high base control. Since such determination ratios have multiple divisions in common, it is possible to easily design a table used to determine the jackpot type, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Also, since the allocation of each division to the jackpot type that is the determination result differs, it is possible to flexibly design the determination ratio of the jackpot type, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

In the determination example AKD01, when the starting hole winning designation value is "1", the probability variable control and the high base control are both "none", so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA01, the second division with a determination ratio of 44/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA02, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA03, and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA04, and the determination ratio is set so that the judgment value data is The judgment value data is set so that the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA01, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA02, the seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA03, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA04, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA05, and the tenth division with a determination ratio of 35/200 is assigned to jackpot type KA06. In addition, when the starting port winning designation value is "1", the probability variable control is "enabled" and the high base control is "disabled", so that the judgment value data is set so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200 and the second division with a determination ratio of 44/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA02, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA04, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200 and the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA02, the seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200 and the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA04, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA05, and the tenth division with a determination ratio of 35/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA06. When the starting hole winning designation value is "1", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation control, the high base control is "on", so the judgment value data is set so that the first division with a determination ratio of 11/200, the second division with a determination ratio of 44/200, the third division with a determination ratio of 11/200, and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 34/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA08, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 12/200, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 7/200, the seventh division with a determination ratio of 12/200, and the eighth division with a determination ratio of 19/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA11, and the ninth division with a determination ratio of 15/200 and the tenth division with a determination ratio of 35/200 are assigned to the jackpot type KA15.

In the determination example AKD01, when the starting hole winning designation value is "2", the first division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the second division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are both assigned to the jackpot type NA05, the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA06, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 1/200, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 1/200 and the sixth division with a determination ratio of 1/200 are assigned to the jackpot type NA07, The judgment value data is set so that the seventh division with a determination ratio of 2/200 is assigned to the jackpot type NA07, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA07, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 50/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA08, the tenth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA09, and the eleventh division with a determination ratio of 14/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA10. In addition, when the starting port winning designation value is "2", the judgment value data is set so that each division of the determination ratio due to the probability variable control being "yes" and the high base control being "no" is assigned to a common jackpot type with each division of the determination ratio due to the probability variable control and the high base control both being "no". When the starting hole winning designation value is "2", regardless of the presence or absence of the probability control, the high base control is "on", so the first division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the second division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the big win type NA09, the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 and the fourth division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the big win type NA10, the fifth division with a determination ratio of 1/200, the sixth division with a determination ratio of 1/200, and the third division with a determination ratio of 2/200 are assigned to the big win type NA11. The judgment value data is set so that the seventh division is assigned to the jackpot type NA11, the eighth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA12, the ninth division with a determination ratio of 50/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA13, the tenth division with a determination ratio of 62/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA14, and the eleventh division with a determination ratio of 14/200 is assigned to the jackpot type KA15.

Figure 9-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS109 of Figure 9-1 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 judges whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not (step AKS221). For example, the hit flag is read, and if the read value is 01 [H], which is a jackpot designated value, it is judged that the special chart display result is a "jackpot". If the special chart display result is a "miss" and not a "jackpot" (step AKS221; No), the start port winning designated value is read (step AKS222). Accordingly, the presentation state selection designated value is read (step AKS223). The presentation state selection designated value is a stored value in the presentation state selection buffer, and can be set to any value from 00 [H] to 0D [H], for example. When the jackpot game state ends, a value corresponding to the jackpot type can be set as the presentation state selection designated value. In addition, when the variable display ends, the presentation state selection designated value can be updated in response to the establishment of a preset update condition. When the game state is in the normal state, the presentation state selection designated value is set to 00 [H].

After step AKS223, a loss time fluctuation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS224). The loss time fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table used to select a fluctuation pattern type when the special chart display result is a "loss", and it is sufficient if it is possible to specify a different table based on the starting gate winning designation value read out by step AKS222 and the performance state selection designation value read out by step AKS223. Furthermore, when the special chart display result is a "loss", it is sufficient if multiple fluctuation pattern type selection tables that can be selected corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are prepared in advance.

When the special chart display result is "jackpot" in response to step AKS221 (step AKS221; Yes), a jackpot type designation value is read out (step AKS225). Accordingly, a presentation state selection designation value is read out (step AKS226). Then, a jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table is designated (step AKS227). The jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table used to select a fluctuation pattern type when the special chart display result is "jackpot", and it is sufficient if it is possible to designate a table corresponding to the jackpot type read out in step AKS225 and the presentation state selection designation value read out in step AKS226.

After steps AKS224 and AKS227, the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern is read (step AKS228). The data indicating the value of the random number value MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern may be stored in the buffer for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special pattern corresponding buffer. Next, the type of fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern (step AKS229). Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table is specified (step AKS230). In step AKS230, it is sufficient that a different fluctuation pattern determination table can be specified in response to the type of fluctuation pattern selected in step AKS229. Then, the value of the random number MR5 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern is read (step AKS231). The data indicating the value of the random number MR5 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be stored in the buffer for determining the type of fluctuation pattern included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special pattern corresponding buffer. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the random number MR5 used to determine the fluctuation pattern (step AKS232).

Following step AKS232, a command transmission setting at the start of fluctuation is performed (step AKS233). The command transmission setting at the start of fluctuation may include the specification of a fluctuation command transmission table and the execution of a command set process. The fluctuation command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a performance control command at the start of fluctuation in response to the start of fluctuation of the special pattern in the special pattern game. For example, the fluctuation command transmission table specified in response to the first special pattern game includes table data for transmitting a performance pattern designation command, a first fluctuation start designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation command in addition to the table top data indicating the number of processes. In contrast, the fluctuation command transmission table specified in response to the second special pattern game includes table data for transmitting a performance pattern designation command, a second fluctuation start designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation command in addition to the table top data specifying the number of processes.

After step AKS233, the special symbol fluctuation time is set (step AKS236). The special symbol fluctuation time indicates the variable display time as the special symbol fluctuation time. In order to set the special symbol fluctuation time, a special symbol fluctuation time table is specified. The special symbol fluctuation time table contains table data for setting time data indicating the variable display time such as the special symbol fluctuation time in accordance with the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern. In step AKS236, the specified special symbol fluctuation time table is referenced and a time data expansion process is executed, whereby the time data corresponding to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern is stored in the HL register. The time data obtained in this way can be set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer as the variable time data.

After step AKS236, data after the change pattern is set (step AKS237), and then the change pattern setting process is terminated. In order to set data after the change pattern, a data table after the change pattern is specified. The data table after the change pattern is set includes table data for updating the special pattern process code to 01 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special pattern change process. The data table after the change pattern is set also includes table data for updating the stored value of the special pattern change display buffer to 01 [H]. The special pattern change display buffer stores values that specify the display pattern during the change of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and includes a first special pattern change display buffer corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second special pattern change display buffer corresponding to the second special pattern. In step AKS237, by executing data set processing with reference to the specified data table after setting the variation pattern, the stored value of the first special symbol variation display buffer is updated to 01 [H] when the first special symbol game is started, and the stored value of the second special symbol variation display buffer is updated to 01 [H] when the second special symbol game is started. In addition, the random number value buffer in which the random numbers used for determining the variation pattern are stored may be cleared to initialize the stored value.

Figure 9-4 shows an example of a miss variation pattern. A miss variation pattern is a variation pattern that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "miss". The multiple variation patterns each differ in the special chart variation time and the variable display mode of the performance pattern. The miss variation pattern includes a reach variation pattern that becomes a reach mode in the variable display of the performance pattern, and a non-reach variation pattern that does not become a reach mode. In the example of the configuration shown in Figure 9-4, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-6 and the variation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-9 are included in the non-reach variation pattern, and the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-7 and the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 are included in the reach variation pattern. The reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach performance of a super reach is executed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 9-4, the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 are included in the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 to PA2-7 and the fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are included in the super reach fluctuation pattern. The normal reach fluctuation pattern includes fluctuation patterns with different presentation modes such as reach presentation, such as normal reach NOA, normal reach NOB, and normal reach NOC. The super reach fluctuation pattern includes fluctuation patterns with different presentation modes such as reach presentation, such as super reach SPA, super reach SPB, super reach SPC, super reach SPD, super reach SPE, and super reach SPF. In addition to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the reach fluctuation pattern includes a high-speed reach fluctuation pattern in which the display result stops after the reach mode is reached in a short time. For example, the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 shown in Figure 9-4 has a short special chart fluctuation time of 3,500 milliseconds, and is a high-speed reach fluctuation pattern that is the presentation mode for a high-speed reach SRA.

Figure 9-5 shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern. A jackpot fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the special chart display result is "jackpot". The variable display of the performance pattern according to the jackpot fluctuation pattern is a fixed display of the confirmed performance pattern of the jackpot combination after the reach state is reached. The jackpot fluctuation pattern includes a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed, similar to the reach fluctuation pattern in the miss fluctuation pattern. In the configuration example shown in Figure 9-5, the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 are included in the fluctuation patterns in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and the fluctuation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-10 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-11 are included in the fluctuation patterns in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In addition to the normal reach and super reach reach effects, the jackpot fluctuation patterns also include fluctuation patterns in which the final performance pattern of the jackpot combination stops and displays in a short time. For example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 shown in FIG. 9-5 has an extremely short special chart fluctuation time of 2500 milliseconds, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the display result stops and displays a high-speed SQA without executing a reach performance. In addition, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 has a short special chart fluctuation time of 4500 milliseconds, and is a high-speed reach performance pattern in which the display result stops and displays a high-speed reach SRA after a short time in the reach mode.

Figure 9-6 (A) shows a setting example AKA01 of the loss reference table. The loss reference table is a table that is referenced when specifying the loss variation pattern type selection table in step AKS224 of the variation pattern setting process shown in Figure 9-3. As the loss reference table, multiple tables corresponding to the performance state selection designated value may be prepared in advance. In the setting example AKA01, one of the reference tables TS01 to TS09 is referenced as the loss reference table in response to the performance state selection designated value being 00 [H] and 06 [H] to 0E [H]. Each of the reference tables TS01 to TS09 is composed of table data that allows one of multiple tables prepared in advance to be specified as the loss variation pattern type selection table in response to the start port winning designated value, the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved memory number.

Figure 9-6 (B) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS01. Reference table TS01 is referenced when the presentation state selection designated value is 00 [H]. When the start gate winning designated value is "1", reference table TS01 allows table TA10 to be designated as the loss-time variation pattern type selection table when the first reserved memory number is "0", table TA11 when the first reserved memory number is "1", table TA12 when the first reserved memory number is "2", and table TA13 when the first reserved memory number is "3". In addition, when the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS01 allows the table TA20 to be designated as the table for selecting the variation pattern type when the first reserved memory number is "0" and the second reserved memory number is "0" to "3", and the table TA21 to be designated as the table for selecting the variation pattern type when the first reserved memory number is "1" to "4" and the second reserved memory number is "0" to "3". In addition, in step AKS102 of the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 9-1, when the second reserved memory number is other than "0", the start port winning designation value is set to "2" and the second reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. In contrast, when the second reserved memory number is "0", the start port winning designation value is set to "1" and the first reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1. And the upper limit value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is "4". Therefore, when the start port winning designation value is "1" in step AKS224 of the variable pattern setting process, the first reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "3", and the second reserved memory number is "0". Also, when the start port winning designation value is "2" in step AKS224 of the variable pattern setting process, the first reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "4", and the second reserved memory number is any one of "0" to "3".

Figure 9-6 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS02. The reference table TS02 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 06 [H] or 0E [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", the reference table TS02 allows table TB10 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". When the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS02 allows table TB20 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB21 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 9-6 (D) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS03. Reference table TS03 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 07 [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", reference table TS03 allows table TB10 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". When the start port winning designation value is "2", reference table TS03 allows table TB22 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB23 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 9-6 (E) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS04. Reference table TS04 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 08 [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", reference table TS04 allows table TB10 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". When the start port winning designation value is "2", reference table TS04 allows table TB24 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB25 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 9-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS05. Reference table TS05 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 09 [H]. Reference table TS05 allows a common table TB11 to be designated as the loss-time variation pattern type selection table when the start port winning designation value is "1" or "2", regardless of the first reserved memory count or second reserved memory count.

Figure 9-7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of reference table TS06. Reference table TS06 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0A [H]. When the start port winning designation value is "1", reference table TS06 allows table TB12 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "3". When the start port winning designation value is "2", reference table TS06 allows table TB26 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "0", and table TB27 to be designated as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the first reserved memory number of "0" to "4" and the second reserved memory number of "1" to "3".

Figure 9-7 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS07. The reference table TS07 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0B [H]. The reference table TS07 allows a common table TB13 to be specified as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table when the start port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2", regardless of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Figure 9-7 (D) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS08. The reference table TS08 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0C [H]. The reference table TS08 allows a common table TB14 to be specified as the loss-time fluctuation pattern type selection table when the start port winning designation value is "1" and when it is "2", regardless of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Figure 9-7 (E) shows an example of the configuration of the reference table TS09. Reference table TS09 is referenced when the performance state selection designation value is 0D [H]. Reference table TS09 allows the common table TB15 to be designated as the loss time variation pattern type selection table regardless of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number when the start gate winning designation value is "1" or "2".

Figure 9-8 shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot reference table TS21. The jackpot reference table TS21 is a table that is referenced when specifying a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in step AKS227 of the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 9-3. The jackpot reference table TS21 is composed of table data that allows one of multiple pre-prepared tables to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the presentation state selection value and the jackpot type.

When the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows the selection table TA30 to be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA01, NA02, NA05, KA01, KA02, and KA07, the selection table TA31 to be specified as a jackpot type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA03, NA04, NA06, KA03, KA04, KA05, and KA08, and the table TA32 to be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA07, KA06, KA09, and KA10. Note that when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], the game state is a low probability low base state corresponding to the normal state, and the high probability control in the high probability state and the high base control in the time-saving state as the high base state are not performed. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the probability variable control and high base control are "none", it is possible to determine one of the jackpot types NA01 to NA06 and the jackpot types KA01 to KA10, and it is not possible to determine any other jackpot type. Therefore, the jackpot reference table TS21 shows a table that can be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type that can be determined when the presentation state selection designated value is 00 [H]. Even when the presentation state selection designated value is other than 00 [H], a table that can be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table is shown in response to the jackpot type that can be determined when the presentation state selection designated value is that.

When the presentation state selection designation value is 06 [H] or 0E [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB30 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 or KA11 to KA15. When the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB31 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11, and KA12, table TB32 to be designated as the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, table TB33 to be designated as the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB34 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in correspondence with the jackpot type KA15. Alternatively, when the presentation state selection designation value is 08 [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB35 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table corresponding to the jackpot types NA08, NA09, KA11, and KA12, table TB36 to be designated as the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, table TB37 to be designated as the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB38 to be designated as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table corresponding to the jackpot type KA15.

When the presentation state selection designation value is 09 [H], 0B [H], 0C [H], or 0D [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB40 to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type NA08-NA11 or jackpot type KA11-KA14, and table TB41 to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type KA15, respectively. Also, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0A [H], the jackpot reference table TS21 allows table TB42 to be specified as the jackpot type NA08, NA09, KA11, KA12, table TB43 to be specified as the jackpot type NA10, KA13, table TB44 to be specified as the jackpot type NA11, KA14, and table TB45 to be specified as the jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type KA15, respectively. The period during which the performance state selection designation value can be set to any of 06 [H] to 0E [H] is included in the period during which high base control is performed in the time-saving state as the high base state. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when high base control is "on", it can be determined to be any of the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and KA11 to KA15, and cannot be determined to any other jackpot type. Therefore, the jackpot reference table TS21 shows a table that can be specified as the jackpot time variation pattern type selection table in response to the jackpot type that can be determined when the performance state selection designation value is any of 06 [H] to 0E [H].

Figures 9-9 and 9-10 show example configurations of tables that can be specified as failure-time fluctuation pattern type selection tables. Tables that can be specified as failure-time fluctuation pattern type selection tables include tables TA10 to TA13, tables TA20, TA21, tables TB10 to TB15, and tables TB20 to TB27. Each table that can be specified as a failure-time fluctuation pattern type selection table is composed of table data that includes judgment value data that indicates the allocation judgment value for each selectable fluctuation pattern type.

Table TA10 shown in FIG. 9-9(A) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B) is referenced. Table TA10 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-1, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. Table TA11 shown in FIG. 9-9(B) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B) is referenced. Table TA11 is configured with judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-2, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. Table TA12 shown in FIG. 9-9(C) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B) is referenced. The table TA12 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-3, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. The table TA13 shown in FIG. 9-9 (D) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (B) is referenced. The table TA13 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA1-4, CA1-5, CA2-1, CA2-2, and CA2-3 can be selected. The table TA20 shown in FIG. 9-9 (E) can be specified when the reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (B) is referenced. The table TA20 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CA1-1 can be selected. Table TA21 shown in FIG. 9-9(F) can be specified when referring to reference table TS01 shown in FIG. 9-6(B). Table TA21 is configured with judgment value data in which allocation judgment values are set so that only fluctuation pattern types CA1-3 can be selected.

Table TB10 shown in FIG. 9-10(A) can be specified when the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C) or the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6(D) is referred to. Table TB10 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1 can be selected. Table TB11 shown in FIG. 9-10(B) can be specified when the reference table TS05 shown in FIG. 9-7(A) is referred to. Table TB11 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-5 can be selected. Table TB12 shown in FIG. 9-10(C) can be specified when the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 9-7(B) is referred to. Table TB12 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1 can be selected. Table TB13 shown in FIG. 9-10(D) can be specified when the reference table TS07 shown in FIG. 9-7(C) is referenced. Table TB13 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB1-7 can be selected. Table TB14 shown in FIG. 9-10(E) can be specified when the reference table TS08 shown in FIG. 9-7(D) is referenced. Table TB14 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB1-8 can be selected. Table TB15 shown in FIG. 9-10(F) can be specified when the reference table TS09 shown in FIG. 9-7(E) is referenced. Table TB15 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB1-9 can be selected.

Table TB20 shown in FIG. 9-10 (G) can be specified when the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6 (C) is referenced. Table TB20 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 can be selected. Table TB21 shown in FIG. 9-10 (H) can be specified when the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6 (C) is referenced. Table TB21 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 can be selected. Table TB22 shown in FIG. 9-10 (I) can be specified when the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) is referenced. Table TB22 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB23 shown in FIG. 9-10(J) can be specified when the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6(D) is referred to. The table TB23 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB24 shown in FIG. 9-10(K) can be specified when the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6(E) is referred to. The table TB24 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. The table TB25 shown in FIG. 9-10(L) can be specified when the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6(E) is referred to. Table TB25 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-4, and CB2-1 can be selected. Table TB26 shown in FIG. 9-10(M) can be specified when the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 9-7(B) is referenced. Table TB26 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2, CB1-6, and CB2-2 can be selected. Table TB27 shown in FIG. 9-10(N) can be specified when the reference table TS06 shown in FIG. 9-7(B) is referenced. Table TB27 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CB1-3, CB1-6, and CB2-2 can be selected.

Figures 9-11 and 9-12 show example configurations of tables that can be specified as jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection tables. Tables that can be specified as jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection tables include tables TA30 to TA32, tables TB30 to TB38, and tables TB40 to TB45. Each table that can be specified as a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table is composed of table data that includes judgment value data that indicates the allocation judgment value for each selectable fluctuation pattern type.

Each table from table TA30 shown in FIG. 9-11(A) to table TA32 shown in FIG. 9-11(C) can be specified in accordance with the type of jackpot when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H] by referring to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Table TA30 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-3 can be selected. Table TA31 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-1 to CA3-4 can be selected. Table TA32 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that any one of the fluctuation pattern types CA3-2 to CA3-4 can be selected.

Table TB30 shown in FIG. 9-11(D) can be specified in response to any jackpot type when the performance state selection designated value is 06 [H] or 0E [H] with reference to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Table TB30 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-1 can be selected. Each table from table TB31 shown in FIG. 9-11(E) to table TB34 shown in FIG. 9-11(H) can be specified in response to a jackpot type when the performance state selection designated value is 07 [H] with reference to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Table TB31 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. Table TB32 is configured with judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. Table TB33 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 can be selected. Table TB34 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5 can be selected. Each table from table TB35 shown in FIG. 9-11 (I) to table TB38 shown in FIG. 9-11 (L) can be specified corresponding to the jackpot type when the performance state selection designation value is 08 [H] with reference to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Table TB35 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. Table TB36 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. Table TB37 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 can be selected. Table TB38 is composed of judgment value data in which the allocation judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern types CB3-5 can be selected.

Table TB40 shown in FIG. 9-12(A) and table TB41 shown in FIG. 9-12(B) can be specified in accordance with the jackpot type when the presentation state selection designated value is 09[H], 0B[H], 0C[H], or 0D[H] by referring to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Table TB40 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB4-1 can be selected. Table TB41 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only the fluctuation pattern type CB4-2 can be selected. Each table from table TB42 shown in FIG. 9-12(C) to table TB45 shown in FIG. 9-12(F) can be specified in accordance with the jackpot type when the presentation state selection designated value is 0A[H] by referring to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Table TB42 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-3 can be selected. Table TB43 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-4 can be selected. Table TB44 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-5 can be selected. Table TB46 is composed of judgment value data in which a distribution judgment value is set so that only fluctuation pattern type CB4-6 can be selected.

Figures 9-13 to 9-16 show the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 9-3, one fluctuation pattern is determined in step AKS232 based on the fluctuation pattern determination table specified in step AKS230 in response to the fluctuation pattern type selected in step AKS229. The fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of table data including judgment value data indicating the allocation judgment value for each determinable fluctuation pattern.

For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-1 shown in Figure 9-13 (A), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1, PA1-5, and PA1-6. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 shown in Figure 9-13 (B), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can only be determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-2. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-3 shown in Figure 9-13 (C), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can only be determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-3. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-4 shown in Figure 9-13 (D), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can only be determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-4. For the fluctuation pattern type CA1-5 shown in Figure 9-13 (E), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-5 and PA1-6.

For the fluctuation pattern type CA2-1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (F), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3. For the fluctuation pattern type CA2-2 shown in FIG. 9-13 (G), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5. For the fluctuation pattern type CA2-3 shown in FIG. 9-13 (H), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-6 and PA2-7.

The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 shown in FIG. 9-13 (I) so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-2 shown in FIG. 9-13 (J) so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-4 to PA3-7. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 shown in FIG. 9-13 (K) so that it can be determined to be only the fluctuation pattern PA3-8. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CA3-4 shown in FIG. 9-13 (L) so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-9 and PA3-10.

For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-1 shown in Figure 9-14 (A), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB1-1. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 shown in Figure 9-14 (B), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB1-2. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 shown in Figure 9-14 (C), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB1-3. For the fluctuation pattern type CB1-4 shown in Figure 9-14 (D), a distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be either of the fluctuation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-5 shown in FIG. 9-14(E) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-6. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-6 shown in FIG. 9-14(F) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to one of the fluctuation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-7 shown in FIG. 9-14(G) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-7. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-8 shown in FIG. 9-14(H) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-8. The fluctuation pattern type CB1-9 shown in FIG. 9-14(I) is set to a distribution judgment value by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only to the fluctuation pattern PB1-9. The classification judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 9-14 (J) and the fluctuation pattern type CB2-2 shown in FIG. 9-14 (K) can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3.

The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-1 shown in FIG. 9-15(A) so that it can be determined to only the fluctuation pattern PB3-1. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 shown in FIG. 9-15(B) so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 9-15(C) and the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 9-15(D) so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. The distribution judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5 shown in FIG. 9-15(E) so that it can be determined to any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11.

For the fluctuation pattern type CB4-1 shown in FIG. 9-16(A), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB3-2. For the fluctuation pattern type CB4-2 shown in FIG. 9-16(B), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined only for the fluctuation pattern PB3-9. For the fluctuation pattern type CB4-3 shown in FIG. 9-16(C), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined for any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2. For the fluctuation pattern type CB4-4 shown in FIG. 9-16(D) and the fluctuation pattern type CB4-5 shown in FIG. 9-16(E), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined for any one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. For the fluctuation pattern type CB4-6 shown in Figure 9-16 (F), the allocation judgment value is set by the judgment value data of the fluctuation pattern determination table so that it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11.

Figure 9-17 shows an example of a setting of a performance pattern designation command AKB01. In the variation pattern setting process shown in Figure 9-3, in the setting of transmission of the command at the start of variation by step AKS233, the performance pattern designation command is controlled to be transmittable. For example, when the special chart display result is "jackpot", the performance pattern designation command corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type is made transmittable. For example, in correspondence with the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 whose jackpot types are included in "normal", the performance pattern designation command is set to one of the commands 8C01 [H], 8C02 [H], 8C0B [H], 8C0C [H]. In correspondence with the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 whose jackpot types are included in "probable change", the performance pattern designation command is set to one of the commands 8C04 [H] to 8C0A [H]. The performance control board 12 can determine the performance patterns that make up the final performance pattern based on the performance pattern designation command sent from the main board 11.

Figure 9-18 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS121). In this special symbol process timer, the fluctuation time data corresponding to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern is set as the timer initial value in step AKS236 of the fluctuation pattern setting processing shown in Figure 9-3. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS121; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS122), and the special symbol variation processing ends.

When the time count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), the special symbol process code is updated to 02 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step AKS123). In addition, the special symbol stop time is set (step AKS124). In step AKS124, time data corresponding to a predetermined special symbol stop time, such as 500 milliseconds, may be set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer as the special symbol stop time data. In conjunction with the setting of the special symbol stop time, a setting for sending a performance symbol determination command may be performed. Then, it is determined whether the count value of the special symbol counter is "0" or not (step AKS125). When the jackpot game state ends, the special symbol counter is set to a predetermined special symbol counter initial value corresponding to the establishment of the special symbol control condition. If the special symbol control condition is not established, the count value of the special symbol counter is maintained at "0".

If the count value of the high probability counter is other than "0" in response to step AKS125 (step AKS125; No), the count value of the high probability counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS126). Then, it is determined whether the count value of the high probability counter after the update is "0" (step AKS127). If the count value after the update is "0" (step AKS127; Yes), data setting at the end of the high probability state is performed (step AKS128). The data setting at the end of the high probability state includes the specification of a data table at the end of the high probability state and the execution of data set processing. The data table at the end of the high probability state only needs to include clear data for clearing the high probability state flag. This clears the high probability state flag and turns it off, and the high probability state control in the high probability state ends.

If the count value of the probability bonus counter is "0" in response to step AKS125 (step AKS125; Yes), if the updated count value is other than "0" in response to step AKS127 (step AKS127; No), or after step AKS128, it is determined whether the count value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step AKS129). When the jackpot game state ends, the time-saving counter is set to a time-saving counter initial value that is predetermined in response to the jackpot type.

If the count value of the time-saving counter is other than "0" in response to step AKS129 (step AKS129; No), the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS130). Then, it is determined whether the count value of the time-saving counter after the update is "0" (step AKS131). If the count value after the update is "0" (step AKS131; Yes), data setting at the time-saving end is performed (step AKS132). The data setting at the time-saving end includes specifying a data table at the time-saving end and executing data set processing. The data table at the time-saving end only needs to include clear data for clearing the time-saving flag. As a result, the time-saving flag is cleared to the off state, and the high base control in the time-saving state as the high base state ends.

If the count value of the time-saving counter is "0" in response to step AKS129 (step AKS129; Yes), if the updated count value is other than "0" in response to step AKS131 (step AKS131; No), or after step AKS132, it is determined whether the special period effect designation value is 00 [H] or not (step AKS133). The special period effect designation value is a value stored in the special period effect buffer, and can be set to any value between 00 [H] and 0E [H], for example. When the jackpot game state ends, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot or the presence or absence of a V win can be set as the special period effect designation value. When the game state is normal, the special period effect designation value is set to 00 [H].

If the special period performance designation value is 00 [H] corresponding to step AKS133 (step AKS133; Yes), the special symbol change processing ends. In contrast, if the special period performance designation value is other than 00 [H] (step AKS133; No), the special period performance update setting is performed (step AKS134), and the special symbol change processing ends. In step AKS134, a special period performance setting table is specified to perform the special period performance update setting. The special period performance setting table includes table data for updating the performance state designation value based on the number of times the variable display is executed.

Figure 9-19 shows an example of the configuration of the special period performance setting table AKT01. In the special symbol variation process shown in Figure 9-18, in the special period performance update setting of step AKS134, the special period performance setting table AKT01 can be referenced and the performance state selection designation value can be updated. The special period performance setting table AKT01 is composed of table data for setting the performance state selection designation value and the background designation command in association with the time-saving counter judgment value for each special period performance designation value. The time-saving counter judgment value for each special period performance designation value is compared with the count value of the time-saving counter, and if it matches any of the judgment values, the performance state selection designation value associated with that judgment value is stored in the performance state selection buffer, and command data indicating the background designation command associated with that judgment value is stored in the background designation command buffer or the like.

For example, when the special period performance designation value is 05 [H], if the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "63", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 03 [H], and command data indicating command 9503 [H] is stored as the background designation command. In a similar case, if the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "62", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H] and command data indicating command 9506 [H] is stored as the background designation command. If the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H] and command data indicating command 9506 [H] is stored as the background designation command. If the time-saving counter count value matches the time-saving counter judgment value of "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and command data indicating command 9500 [H] is stored as the background designation command. If the time-saving counter reaches "0", the special period effect designation value is cleared and initialized to 00 [H]. This allows the control of the effect state corresponding to the special period to end in response to the end of the time-saving control in the time-saving state as the high base state.

Figure 9-20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS141). The special symbol process timer here has a timer initial value set corresponding to the special symbol stop time in step AKS124 of the special symbol change processing shown in Figure 9-18. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS141; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS142), and the special symbol change processing ends. This causes a wait until the special symbol stop time has elapsed.

If the time count value of the special pattern process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS141 (step AKS141; Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern display result is "jackpot" or not (step AKS143). If the special pattern display result is "jackpot" (step AKS143; Yes), the special pattern process code is updated to 08 [H], which is a value corresponding to the processing before the opening of the large prize opening (step AKS144). In addition, the jackpot type designation value is read (step AKS145). At this time, the jackpot start performance initial value corresponding to the reading result of the jackpot type designation value is set as the initial value in the special pattern process timer (step AKS146). After that, the sending setting of the jackpot start designation command is performed (step AKS147), and the data before the initial opening of the large prize opening is set (step AKS148), and the special pattern stop processing is terminated. The data setting before the first opening of the large prize opening includes the specification of a data table before the first opening of the large prize opening and the execution of data set processing. The data table before the first opening of the large prize opening includes clear data for clearing various data included in the targets to be cleared before the first opening of the large prize opening. The targets to be cleared before the first opening of the large prize opening include a hit flag, a time-saving flag, a time-saving counter, a probability-changing flag, a probability-changing counter, a performance state selection buffer, and a special period performance buffer. Of these, the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter are cleared to end the time-saving control in the time-saving state as the high base state. In addition, the probability-changing flag and the probability-changing counter are cleared to end the probability-changing control in the probability-changing state as the high probability state.

If the special pattern display result is "miss" and not "jackpot" in response to step AKS143 (step AKS143; No), the special pattern process code is cleared and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H] (step AKS149). In addition, data setting after the miss stop is performed (step AKS150), and the special pattern stop processing ends. Data setting after the miss stop includes designation of the data table after the miss stop and execution of the data setting processing. The data table after the miss stop includes clear data for clearing various data included in the setting clear target after the miss stop. The setting clear target after the miss stop may include the demo display flag and the starting port winning designation value. The storage area corresponding to these is cleared by the data set processing included in the data setting after the miss stop, and each stored value is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". By clearing the demo display flag, standby command transmission setting, etc. can be performed in the special pattern normal processing. In addition, in response to the end of the special game, the starting gate winning designation value, which can identify whether it is the first special game or the second special game, is cleared and initialized to 00 [H], which corresponds to "0".

Figure 9-21 shows a setting example AKB02 at the start of a jackpot. In the special pattern stop process, the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed, the jackpot start command, the jackpot start presentation time, and the jackpot start presentation pattern can be set by the data setting before the first opening of the jackpot opening in step AKS148 based on the jackpot type designation value read out in step AKS145. The jackpot start designation command is set in the transmission setting in step AKS147. The data table before the first opening of the jackpot opening is composed of table data for setting the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed, the jackpot start command, the jackpot start presentation time, and the jackpot start presentation pattern in association with the jackpot type specified from the jackpot type designation value. The data indicating the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed set by the data setting before the first opening of the jackpot opening is stored in the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed buffer. The time data corresponding to the jackpot start presentation time set by the data setting before the first opening of the jackpot opening is set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer. The jackpot start presentation pattern may be set by the presentation control CPU 120 of the presentation control board 12, for example, based on a combination of a presentation symbol designation command and a jackpot start designation command sent from the main board 11.

The maximum number of times the large prize opening is possible corresponds to the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot start setting example AKB02, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is possible to be set to one of "02", "03", "04", "07", or "10" according to the type of jackpot. Therefore, the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state is set to one of 2 rounds, 3 rounds, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, or 10 rounds. When the upper limit number of times is a 2-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 2-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 3-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 3-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 4-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 4-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 7-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 7-round jackpot. When the upper limit number of times is a 10-round jackpot game state, it is also called a 10-round jackpot.

In the jackpot start time setting example AKB02, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to any of 100 milliseconds, 7500 milliseconds, 8000 milliseconds, and 14000 milliseconds. For example, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to 100 milliseconds in correspondence with the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA11 to KA14. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "Yes", it can be determined to be either the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA15. On the other hand, when the high base control is "No", the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA14 is not determined. Therefore, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to a shorter time when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during the period when high base control is being performed in the time-saving state as the high base state, than when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during the period when high base control is not being performed in the low base state. Alternatively, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to 14000 milliseconds in response to the jackpot type KA15, and the jackpot start time can be set to a time shorter than 14000 milliseconds in response to other than the jackpot type KA15. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "yes", the jackpot type KA15 can be determined at a predetermined rate, and when the high base control is "no", the jackpot type KA15 is not determined. Therefore, the jackpot start presentation time can be set to a longer time when the special chart display results in a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is being performed in a time-saving state in a high base state, than when the special chart display results in a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is not being performed in a low base state.

Figure 9-22 is a flow chart showing an example of jackpot end processing. In jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS161). The special symbol process timer here is set to a timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end presentation time in the post-opening processing of the jackpot opening selected by the special symbol process processing. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS161; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS162), and the processing ends. This causes the process to wait until the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed.

If the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS161 (step AKS161; Yes), the special symbol process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] (step AKS163). In addition, the jackpot type designation value is read (step AKS164), and the specific area passing flag is confirmed (step AKS165). The specific area passing flag is set to the ON state when the specific area switch 24 detects a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 in response to the execution of a round in the jackpot game state. In contrast, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning area 51 and is not detected by the specific area switch 24, the specific area passing flag is maintained in the OFF state.

After step AKS165, the state setting at the end of the jackpot (step AKS166), the command transmission setting at the end of the jackpot (step AKS167), and the data setting at the end of the jackpot (AKS168) are performed, and the process ends. The state setting at the end of the jackpot includes settings related to the game state and the performance state after the end of the jackpot game state, and it is sufficient if it is possible to set the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter initial value, the probability flag and the probability counter initial value, the special period performance designation value, and the performance state selection designation value, etc., in accordance with the type of jackpot and the presence or absence of V winning. The command transmission setting at the end of the jackpot may include the designation of the command table at the end of the jackpot and the execution of the command set process. The command table at the end of the jackpot includes table data for transmitting the performance control command at the end of the jackpot in response to the end of the jackpot game state. For example, the performance control command at the end of the jackpot may include the jackpot end designation command and the background designation command. The data setting at the end of the jackpot may include the specification of a data table at the end of the jackpot and the execution of a data set process. The data table at the end of the jackpot includes clear data for clearing various data included in the target for clearing at the end of the jackpot. The target for clearing at the end of the jackpot may include a demo display flag, a variable command designation buffer, a maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened buffer, a start port winning designation value, etc. The storage areas corresponding to these are cleared by the data set process included in the data setting at the end of the jackpot, and each stored value, etc. is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

Figure 9-23 shows a jackpot end setting example AKB11. The jackpot end setting example AKB11 allows the time-saving counter initial value, jackpot end presentation time, and presentation state selection designated value to be set in accordance with the jackpot type when the jackpot game state ends. The time-saving counter initial value can be set by the jackpot end state setting in step AKS166 of the jackpot end processing. The jackpot end presentation time and presentation state selection designated value only need to be set in conjunction with the update of the special symbol process code in the post-opening processing of the large prize opening selected by the special symbol process processing.

The time-saving counter initial value corresponds to the upper limit number of times that the variable display can be executed in the time-saving state as the high base state. In the jackpot end setting example AKB11, the time-saving counter initial value can be set to any of "8", "70", "100", "570", or "10,000" depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, the upper limit number of times that the variable display can be executed in the time-saving state as the high base state is set to any of 8, 70, 100, 570, or 10,000.

The initial value of the probability change counter can be set to "70" when the specific area passing flag is on, corresponding to a V win. In contrast, when the specific area passing flag is off, corresponding to no V win, the initial value of the probability change counter is set to "0". Therefore, the upper limit number of times that the variable display can be executed in the probability change state as a high probability state is set to 70 times based on the establishment of the probability change control condition due to the occurrence of a V win in the jackpot game state.

The upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state as the high base state may be set to a common number of times or a different number of times compared to the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state as the high probability state. For example, when the time-saving counter initial value is set to "8", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is 8 times, which is less than the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state, which is 70 times. In contrast, when the time-saving counter initial value is set to either "570" or "10000", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is 570 times or 10000 times, which is greater than the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state, which is 70 times. On the other hand, when the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the time-saving state is a common number to the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the high probability state, which is 70 times.

The initial value of the probability variable counter, "70", which can be set in response to the control of the probability variable state, is also included in the initial value of the time-saving counter which can be set in response to the control of the time-saving state, and becomes the first number of times that the variable display can be executed in the first state. When such an initial value of the probability variable counter and the time-saving counter are set to "70", the high probability high base state in which high base control is performed together with the probability variable control becomes the first state that can be controlled until the first number of variable displays are executed after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state. In the example of the setting at the end of the jackpot AKB11, when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to any of the jackpot types NA05 to NA07 or jackpot types KA02, KA04 to KA15, the initial value of the probability variable counter and the time-saving counter are set to "70", and the state is controlled to the high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state. However, in a jackpot game state that corresponds to any of the jackpot types NA05 to NA07 that are included in the "normal" jackpot type, the operation of the distribution member that serves as the V winning opening opening member is controlled so that the game ball is less likely to pass through the V winning area 51.

The "10000" included in the time-saving counter initial value that can be set in response to the control of the time-saving state is the second number of times that the variable display can be executed in the second state. Therefore, when the probability variable counter initial value is "0" and the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", the low probability high base state in which there is no probability variable control and high base control is performed becomes the second state that can be controlled until the variable display is executed more than the first number of times after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state. In the jackpot end setting example AKB11, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", and the game is controlled to the low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Here, since the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 are included in the jackpot type "normal", the game ball is unlikely to pass through the V winning area 51 in the jackpot game state, and the probability variable counter initial value becomes "0" at a high rate.

In the jackpot end time setting example AKB11, the jackpot end presentation time can be set to 3500 milliseconds, 9500 milliseconds, or 48000 milliseconds, corresponding to the jackpot type. For example, the jackpot end presentation time can be set to 3500 milliseconds, corresponding to the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and KA11 to KA15. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, when the high base control is "Yes", it can be determined to be either the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA15. On the other hand, when the high base control is "No", the jackpot type NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot type KA11 to KA14 is not determined. Therefore, the jackpot end presentation time can be set to a shorter time when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is being performed in a time-saving state in a high base state, than when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" during a period when high base control is not being performed in a low base state.

In the jackpot end setting example AKB11, the presentation state selection designated value can be set to either 02 [H] or 06 [H] depending on the jackpot type. For example, the presentation state selection designated value can be set to 06 [H] depending on the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 and KA11 to KA15. In contrast, the presentation state selection designated value can be set to 02 [H] or 06 [H] depending on the jackpot types NA01 to NA07 and KA01 to KA10. In the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in Figure 9-2, when high base control is "Yes", it can be determined to either the jackpot types NA08 to NA11 or the jackpot types KA11 to KA15. On the other hand, when high base control is "none", the jackpot types NA08-NA11 and KA11-KA14 are not determined. Therefore, when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during a low base state period when high base control is not being performed, the presentation state selection designation value corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state may be set to the same value as when the special chart display result is "jackpot" during a period when high base control is being performed in a time-saving state as a high base state, or it may be set to a different value.

Figure 9-24 shows a jackpot end setting example AKB12. When a jackpot game state ends, the jackpot end setting example AKB12 allows the jackpot end designation command, the special period presentation designation value, and the post-jackpot background designation to be set in response to the jackpot types NA01 to NA11 whose jackpot types are included in "normal". The jackpot end designation command can be set by the jackpot end command transmission setting in step AKS167 of the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 9-22. The special period presentation designation value can be set by the jackpot end state setting in step AKS166 of the jackpot end processing. The post-jackpot background designation can be set by the jackpot end data setting in step AKS168 of the jackpot end processing, and command data indicating the background designation command is stored in a background designation command buffer or the like. In addition, the jackpot end command transmission setting in step AKS167 of the jackpot end processing may be set to enable sending of a background specification command corresponding to the background specification after the jackpot.

For example, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA01, command A300 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 01 [H], and command data indicating command 9502 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the post-jackpot background designation. In contrast, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA01, command A300 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 02 [H], and command data indicating 9508 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the post-jackpot background designation. Also, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA02, command A301 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 03 [H], and command data indicating command 9502 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the post-jackpot background designation. In contrast, when a V win occurs during a jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot type NA02, command A307 [H] is sent as a jackpot end command, the special period performance designation value is set to 04 [H], and command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as a background designation command that designates the post-jackpot background. Settings corresponding to other jackpot types and the presence or absence of a V win are as shown in Figure 9-24.

Figure 9-25 shows a setting example AKB13 for when a jackpot ends. The setting example AKB13 for when a jackpot ends allows the jackpot end designation command, the special period presentation designation value, and the post-jackpot background designation to be set in correspondence with the jackpot types KA01 to KA15 whose jackpot types are included in "probable change" when the jackpot gaming state ends. For example, when there is no V win in the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the jackpot type KA01, command A300 [H] is sent as the jackpot end designation command, the special period presentation designation value is set to 01 [H], and command data indicating command 9502 [H] is stored as the background designation command that designates the post-jackpot background. On the other hand, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA01, the command A300 [H] is transmitted as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 02 [H], and command data indicating 9508 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the jackpot post-background designation. Also, when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA02, the command A302 [H] is transmitted as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 06 [H], and command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the jackpot post-background designation. On the other hand, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA02, the command A302 [H] is transmitted as the jackpot end designation command, the special period performance designation value is set to 05 [H], and command data indicating 9503 [H] is stored as the background designation command for the jackpot post-background designation. Settings for other types of jackpots and whether or not a V win occurs are as shown in Figure 9-25.

Figure 9-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern change start process. In the effect pattern change start process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the confirmed effect pattern as the display result of the effect pattern (step AKS501). The effect control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable display result corresponding to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the jackpot type that can be specified from the effect pattern designation command. As an example, the variable display content corresponding to the combination of the variable pattern and the variable display result may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probable jackpot (jackpot)", and "probable jackpot (jackpot)".

With the example of the command setting AKB01 for specifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 9-17 and the example of the command setting AKB02 for the start of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-21, each command for specifying the effect pattern can notify the following decision contents. In the case of command 8C01 [H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and it becomes a 3-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C02 [H], the jackpot type is included in "normal" and it becomes a 3-round or 4-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C03 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 2-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C04 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 3-round jackpot, in the case of command 8C05 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 3-round or 4-round jackpot, and in the case of command 8C06 [H], the jackpot type is included in "probable change" and it becomes a 7-round jackpot. In addition, if the command is 8C07[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 10 round jackpot, if the command is 8C08[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 10 round jackpot, if the command is 8C09[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 3 round jackpot, if the command is 8C0A[H], the jackpot type will be included in "probable chance" and it will be a 3 round jackpot, if the command is 8C0B[H], the jackpot type will be included in "normal" and it will be a 2 round jackpot, if the command is 8C0C[H], the jackpot type will be included in "normal" and it will be a 7 round jackpot.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display of the performance pattern does not go into reach mode, the confirmed performance pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display is "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display of the performance pattern goes into reach mode, and then the confirmed performance pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display is "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display is "jackpot," making it difficult for a V win to occur in a jackpot game state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display is "jackpot," making it easier for a V win to occur in a jackpot game state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)", different (mismatched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left" and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5R. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)", the same (matched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left" and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In this case, the center confirmed performance pattern displayed as stopped in the "center" performance pattern display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 among the confirmed performance patterns is determined as a performance pattern different from the confirmed performance patterns on the left and right. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)" or "probability change (jackpot)", the same (matched) performance patterns are determined as the final stop patterns in the "left", "center", and "right" performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. At this time, it is only necessary to determine whether the fixed performance pattern is a normal pattern (e.g., a performance pattern showing an even number) or a performance pattern showing a probability variable (e.g., a performance pattern showing an odd number) depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)" or "probability variable (jackpot)" and whether the promotion performance during the jackpot is executed or not. The promotion performance during the jackpot is a performance in which a combination of performance patterns (non-probability variable jackpot combination) that reminds one of a jackpot but does not remind one of a probability variable state is temporarily displayed on the image display device 5, and then whether or not the probability variable state will be entered during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot game state is notified. When the variable display content is "non-probability variable (jackpot)", a fixed performance pattern is determined from among multiple types of normal patterns. Also, when the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)" and it is determined that the promotion performance during the jackpot is not executed, a fixed performance pattern is determined from among multiple types of probability variable patterns. In contrast, when it is decided to execute the jackpot promotion effect even if the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the fixed effect pattern is selected from among a number of types of normal patterns. This prevents the jackpot promotion effect from being executed even if the fixed effect pattern is derived and displayed in a line of probability change patterns, and thus prevents the player from feeling suspicious.

After the final stop pattern etc. are determined in step AKS501, it is determined whether the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is for result display (step AKS502). In the probability variation state or time-saving state, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches 70 times, the result display can be executed. The result display is a display of information on the results of the game value acquired by the player, such as the total number of prize balls acquired by the player in the jackpot game state and the number of consecutive jackpots. The number of consecutive jackpots is also called the number of consecutive jackpots. In the failure variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, during the execution of the variable display by any of the variation patterns PB1-6 to PB1-9 from the first final during time-saving to the fourth final during time-saving, the result display can be executed, and a value announcement can be executed to announce the result of the value acquired by the player. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 9-5, when the variable display by either the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 or the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is the 70th variable display in the high probability state or the time-saving state, a result display may be performed during the execution of the variable display, and a value notification may be executed to notify the result of the value acquired by the player. In step AKS502, when the variable display is the 70th variable display in the high probability state or the time-saving state, it may be determined that the fluctuation patterns PB1-6 to PB1-9 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 are the fluctuation patterns for the result display. The value notification may include the provision of information regarding any value acquired by the player.

If the variable pattern corresponds to step AKS502 and is for result display (step AKS502; Yes), a result display control setting is performed (step AKS503). The result display control setting is a setting for controlling the execution of a result display that is a value notification while the variable display is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may select a performance pattern provided for result display and set the result display to be executable while the variable display is being executed.

After step AKS503, it is determined whether the variation pattern is for a status notification effect (step AKS504). When a result display is performed during the execution of the variable display, the status notification effect may or may not be executed. The status notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the time-saving state continues even after the number of times the variable display is executed reaches 70 times when the upper limit number of times the variable display can be executed in the time-saving state is 10,000 times. In the miss variation pattern shown in FIG. 9-4, a status notification effect is performed during the execution of the variable display by the fourth and final variation pattern PB1-9 during the time-saving state, and a notification can be executed that the time-saving state has an upper limit of 10,000 times of the variable display. In step AKS504, it is sufficient to determine that the variation pattern is for a status notification effect in correspondence with the variation pattern PB1-9.

If the variable pattern corresponds to step AKS504 and is for a status notification effect (step AKS504; Yes), a status notification effect control setting is performed (step AKS505). The status notification effect control setting is a setting for controlling the execution of notifications by status notification effects while variable display is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may select an effect pattern provided for a status notification effect and set the status notification effect to be executable while variable display is being executed. The status notification effect may include the display of a specific image, such as an effect image of a button display imitating push button 31B.

If the variation pattern is not for the result display corresponding to step AKS502 (step AKS502; No), if the variation pattern is not for the status left performance corresponding to step AKS504 (step AKS504; No), or following step AKS505, other variable display performances are determined (step AKS506). For example, the presence or absence of a preview performance or the preview performance pattern when it is executed may be determined. After that, the performance control pattern is determined (step AKS507). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (performance control pattern at the time of special chart variation) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may select a prepared performance control pattern (result display control pattern) in response to the execution of the result display and set it as the usage pattern. In response to the execution of the status notification performance, a prepared performance control pattern (status notification performance control pattern) may be selected and set as the usage pattern. In response to the execution of the preview performance, a prepared performance control pattern (preview performance control pattern) may be selected and set as the pattern to be used. Note that the presenter is not limited to setting separate performance control patterns as the special chart change performance control pattern, the result display control pattern, the status notification performance control pattern, the preview performance control pattern, or some or all of these, and may set one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of the execution settings of each performance.

After step AKS507, the initial value of the performance control process timer is set in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step AKS508). The performance control process timer is provided, for example, at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and data indicating the time measurement value used for performance control can be stored and memorized. In addition, a setting is made to start the variation of the performance pattern, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS509). At this time, for example, the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step AKS507 may be used to start the variation of the performance pattern in each of the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Accordingly, in accordance with the start of the variable display, a setting is made to update the reserved display on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS510). Then, the performance process code is updated to 02 [H], which is a value corresponding to the processing during the variation of the performance pattern (step AKS511), and the performance pattern variation start processing is terminated.

Figure 9-27 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during the change of the performance pattern. In the processing during the change of the performance pattern, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the special pattern change time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the change pattern, has elapsed, for example, based on the measured value of the performance control process timer (step AKS521). In order to measure the variable display time, an update is performed, such as by subtracting 1 from the measured value of the performance control process timer. In step AKS521, it can be judged that the variable display time has elapsed when, for example, an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the measured value of the performance control process timer after the update.

If the variable display time corresponding to step AKS521 has not elapsed (step AKS521; No), it is determined whether or not it is the preview performance period (step AKS522). The preview performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (preview performance control pattern, etc.) determined in step AKS507 of the performance pattern variation start processing. If it is the preview performance period (step AKS522; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step AKS523).

If it is not the preview performance period corresponding to step AKS522 (step AKS522; No), or after the control by step AKS523, it is determined whether it is the result display period (step AKS524). The result display period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (such as the result display control pattern) determined in step AKS507 of the performance pattern change start processing. If it is the result display period (step AKS524; Yes), control is performed to execute the result display (step AKS525). If it is not the result display period (step AKS524; No), or after the control by step AKS525, it is determined whether it is the status notification performance period (step AKS526). The status notification performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (such as the status notification performance control pattern) determined in step AKS507 of the performance pattern change start processing. If it is the status notification display period (step AKS526; Yes), control is performed to execute the status notification display (step ASK527). In this way, by controlling step AKS525, it is possible to execute a result display that serves as a value notification during the variable display. Also, by controlling step AKS527, it is possible to execute a status notification display that includes a notification that the second state is a low probability high base state during the variable display.

If it is not the status notification display period corresponding to step AKS526 (step AKS526; No), or after the control by step AKS527, it is determined whether or not it is the reach display period (step AKS528). The reach display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (such as the display control pattern during special pattern change) determined in step AKS507 of the display pattern change start processing. If it is the reach display period (step AKS528; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach display (step AKS529). If it is not the reach display period (step AKS528; No), or after the control by step AKS529, control is performed to execute the display during the variable display, including the variable display operation of the display pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the display control pattern determined corresponding to the change pattern (step AKS530), and the processing during the display pattern change is terminated.

When the variable display time has elapsed in response to step AKS521 (step AKS521; Yes), it is determined whether or not a performance pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS531). At this time, if the performance pattern determination command has not been received (step AKS531; No), the processing during the performance pattern change is terminated and the processing waits. In addition, in response to the elapse of a predetermined time without receiving a performance pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, it may be assumed that the performance pattern determination command was not received normally, and a predetermined error processing may be executed. When the performance pattern determination command has been received (step AKS531; Yes), control is performed to cause the final stop pattern, which is the display result in the variable display of the performance pattern, to be derived and displayed as a stop display (step AKS532). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start designation command (step AKS533). Then, the effect process code is updated to 03 [H], which is the value corresponding to the effect pattern change stop processing (step AKS534), and the effect pattern change processing ends.

Next, various control examples related to the characteristic part 23AK will be described. In the pachinko game machine 1, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is being performed, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol display result may be a "jackpot". Such a jackpot is also called a first special symbol jackpot during a high base. In this case, based on the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, high base control is "yes", so the jackpot type is determined to be either jackpot type NA08, which includes the "normal" jackpot type, or jackpot types KA11 and KA15, which include the "probable" jackpot type. In the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in Fig. 9-23, in the case of the jackpot type NA08, the time-saving counter initial value "570" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set, and in the case of the jackpot types KA11 and KA15, the time-saving counter initial value "70" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] are set. In addition, since the jackpot type NA08, which is included in the jackpot type "normal", is unlikely to cause a V win, in the jackpot end time setting example AKB12 shown in Fig. 9-24, if there is no V win for the jackpot type NA08, the special period presentation designated value is set to 0C [H]. In contrast, since jackpot types KA11 and KA15, which are included in the "probable chance" jackpot type, are more likely to result in a V win, in the jackpot end setting example AKB13 shown in Figure 9-25, if there is a V win for jackpot types KA11 and KA15, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H].

Figure 9-28 shows an example of control of the presentation state AKC01 based on the first special chart jackpot during a high base. When the first special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type NA08, the special presentation period designation value is set to 0C [H] in response to no V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "570", and the presentation state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, in response to the end of the variable display, the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in step AKS130 of the special pattern variation processing shown in Figure 9-18. Accordingly, step AKS133 determines that the special period presentation designation value is other than 00 [H], and step AKS134 performs special period presentation update setting. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special effect period designation value is 0C [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "566", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "501", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 09 [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "500", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0A [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "1", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0B [H], and when the time-saving counter count value is "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the first special chart jackpot during the high base is either jackpot type KA11 or KA15, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H] in response to a V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", and the performance state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the time-saving counter count value is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period performance update setting is performed. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special performance period designation value is 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "66", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the time-saving counter count value becomes "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

In the loss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6(A), a reference table corresponding to the presentation state selection designated value is designated, and a variation pattern can be determined using different reference tables. For example, when the presentation state selection designated value is 06 [H], reference table TS02 is designated, when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], reference table TS03 is designated, when the presentation state selection designated value is 09 [H], reference table TS05 is designated, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0A [H], reference table TS06 is designated, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0B [H], reference table TS07 is designated, and when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H], reference table TS08 is designated. In the reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C), when the start-gate winning designated value is "2", either of the selection tables TB20 and TB21 associated with the second reserved memory number can be designated as the variation pattern type selection table. In the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6 (D), when the start port winning designation value is "2", either of the selection tables TB22 and TB23 associated with the second reserved memory number can be designated as the variation pattern type selection table. In this way, the variation pattern can be determined using a variation pattern type selection table that is composed of different table data corresponding to the performance state selection designation value.

In the pachinko game machine 1, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is performed, a special game using a second special symbol may be executed, and the special symbol display result may be a "jackpot". Such a jackpot is also called a second special symbol jackpot during a high base. In this case, based on the jackpot type determination example AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, the jackpot type is determined to be one of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, which include the jackpot type "normal", and the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, which include the jackpot type "probable change". In the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 9-23, the time-saving counter initial value "10000" and the performance state selection designated value 06 [H] are set for the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and the time-saving counter initial value "70" and the performance state selection designated value 06 [H] are set for the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In addition, since V winning is unlikely to occur for jackpot types NA09 to NA11 included in the "normal" jackpot type, in the jackpot end setting example AKB12 shown in FIG. 9-24, if there is no V winning for jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the special period effect designation value is set to 0E [H]. In contrast, V winning is likely to occur for jackpot types KA12 to KA15 included in the "probable change" jackpot type, so in the jackpot end setting example AKB13 shown in FIG. 9-25, if there is a V winning for jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the special period effect designation value is set to 07 [H].

Figure 9-29 shows an example of control of the presentation state AKC02 based on the second special chart jackpot during a high base. When the second special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special presentation period designation value is set to 0E [H] in response to no V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", and the presentation state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period presentation update setting is performed. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special effect period designation value is 0E [H], when the time-saving counter count value reaches "9996", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value reaches "9931", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H], when the time-saving counter count value reaches "9930", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0E [H], and when the time-saving counter count value reaches "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the high base second special chart jackpot is of jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H] in response to the presence of a V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", and the performance state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the time-saving counter count value is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period performance update setting is performed. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special performance period designation value is 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "66", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the time-saving counter count value becomes "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized.

When the 2nd special chart jackpot during the high base was controlled to a low probability high base state based on the jackpot type NA09-NA11 and the 69th variable display is completed, the time-saving counter count is updated to "9931". As a result, the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H], and then when the 70th variable display starts, the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS09 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The reference table TS09 shown in FIG. 9-7 (E) allows table TB15 to be designated as a variation pattern type selection table regardless of the start port winning designation value, the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved memory number. The table TB15 shown in FIG. 9-10 (F) allows only the variation pattern type CB1-9 to be selected. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-9 shown in FIG. 9-14 (I), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 can be determined. In this way, the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 can be determined in response to the 70th variable display in the low probability high base state where the time-saving counter initial value is "10000".

When the 2nd special chart jackpot during the high base was controlled to a high probability high base state based on the jackpot type KA12-KA15, and the 69th variable display is completed, the time-saving counter count is updated to "1". As a result, the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and then when the 70th variable display starts, the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS08 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The reference table TS08 shown in FIG. 9-7 (D) allows table TB14 to be designated as a variation pattern type selection table regardless of the start port winning designation value or the first and second reserved memory numbers. The table TB14 shown in FIG. 9-10 (E) allows only the variation pattern types CB1-8 to be selected. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-8 shown in FIG. 9-14 (H), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 can be determined. In this way, the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 can be determined in response to the 70th variable display in the high probability high base where the time-saving counter initial value is "70".

Figure 9-30 (A) shows a variable display control example AKC11 corresponding to the presentation state selection designation values 0C [H] and 0D [H]. When the presentation state selection designation value is 0C [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and if the variable display result including the special chart display result is a "miss", it can only be determined to the variation pattern type CB1-8 and can only be determined to the variation pattern PB1-8. In the configuration example of the miss variation pattern shown in Figure 9-4, the variation pattern PB1-8 corresponds to the third final during the time reduction, and the special chart variation time is set to 12,500 milliseconds. In contrast, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0D [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and if the variable display result including the special chart display result is a "miss", it can only be determined to the variation pattern type CB1-9 and can only be determined to the variation pattern PB1-9. In the example of the miss fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 9-4, the fluctuation pattern PB1-9 corresponds to the fourth final time during the time-saving period, and the special chart fluctuation time is set to 29,900 milliseconds.

In step AKS502 of the effect pattern change start processing shown in FIG. 9-26, in both the case of change pattern PB1-8 and PB1-9, it is determined that the change pattern is for result display, and result display control setting is performed in step AKS503. Based on this setting, in step AKS525 of the effect pattern change in progress processing shown in FIG. 9-27, control is performed to execute the result display, and it becomes possible to execute a result display as a value notification that notifies the player of the result of the value acquired. Also, in step AKS504 of the effect pattern change start processing shown in FIG. 9-26, in the case of change pattern PB1-9, it is determined that the change pattern is for status notification effect, and status notification effect control setting is performed in step AKS505. Based on this setting, in step AKS527 of the processing during the change in the performance pattern shown in FIG. 9-27, control is performed to execute the status notification performance, and a notification is issued that the time-saving counter initial value is in a low-probability high-base state based on the setting of "10000."

As described above, the low-probability high base state and the high-probability high base state in which the special game using the second special symbol is more likely to be executed by the high base control than in the normal state include, for example, a high-probability high base state that corresponds to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 and can be controlled until 70 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game state ends, corresponding to the first number of times that the time-saving counter initial value is "70," and a low-probability high base state that corresponds to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and can be controlled until 10,000 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game state ends, corresponding to the second number of times that the time-saving counter initial value is "10,000," which is greater than the first number of times. The high-probability high base state in this case corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability high base state corresponds to the second state. Among these, the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined in response to the execution number of the variable display during the high probability high base state being "70" as the first number, and the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined in response to the execution number of the variable display during the low probability high base state being "70" as the first number. At this time, the variation pattern PB1-8 corresponds to the first variable display pattern, and the variation pattern PB1-9 corresponds to the second variable display pattern. Then, a result display that becomes a value notification is executed during the variable display by the variation pattern PB1-8. Also, a result display that becomes a value notification and a state notification performance including a notification regarding the low probability low base state are executed during the variable display by the variation pattern PB1-9. Here, when comparing the special chart variation time, 29900 milliseconds in the variation pattern PB1-9 are longer than 12500 milliseconds in the variation pattern PB1-8. This allows the special chart change time and notification content to be different between the change pattern PB1-8 corresponding to the first variable display pattern and the change pattern PB1-9 corresponding to the second variable display pattern, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

In addition, when the number of variable displays is the first number of "70" during a high probability high base state corresponding to the first state and during a low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, the variable pattern can be determined using table data from a variable pattern determination table that provides different determination data corresponding to the variable pattern types CB1-8 and CB1-9, respectively. In this way, since the variable pattern is determined using different determination data, the 70th variable display corresponding to the first number can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC11, when the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number in the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state, the variable pattern PB1-8 that can be determined so that the special chart display result corresponds to "miss" corresponds to the first non-specific pattern. Also, when the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number in the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, the variable pattern PB1-9 that can be determined so that the special chart display result corresponds to "miss" corresponds to the second non-specific pattern. And, the variable pattern PB1-8 that corresponds to the first non-specific pattern has a special chart fluctuation time of 12500 milliseconds, and the variable pattern PB1-9 that corresponds to the second non-specific pattern has a special chart fluctuation time of 29900 milliseconds, which is more than twice as long. In both cases of the variable patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9, they are result display fluctuation patterns, so a result display that is a value notification is executed during each variable display. Furthermore, in the case of the variable pattern PB1-9, since it is a variable pattern for state notification performance, a notification is executed during the variable display that the second state is a low probability high base state. This allows the 70th variable display corresponding to the first number to be executed appropriately, increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-30 (B) shows a jackpot control example AKC12 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In the jackpot start time setting example AKB02 shown in Figure 9-21, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "02" for jackpot type NA09, "04" for jackpot type NA10, "07" for jackpot type NA11, "02" for jackpot type KA12, "04" for jackpot type KA13, "07" for jackpot type KA14, and "10" for jackpot type KA15. Also, in the example of the jackpot end setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 9-23, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000" corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, and to "70" corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000" only when the jackpot types are any of NA09 to NA11, and is not set for other jackpot types. In the example of the jackpot type determination AKD01 shown in FIG. 9-2, the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 can be determined in response to "Yes" where high base control is performed and the start port winning designated value "2" where the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed. On the other hand, the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 are not determined in response to "No" where high base control is not performed and the start port winning designated value "2". In addition, when the high base control is "off" or "on," the jackpot type is not determined to be NA09 to NA11, corresponding to the start port winning designation value "1" where the special game using the first special symbol is executed.

As a result of the above, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is being performed, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state corresponding to the setting of "10000" based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol being a "jackpot". On the other hand, during a low base in which high base control is not being performed, there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol being a "jackpot". Also, during a high base and a low base, there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the first special symbol being a "jackpot". In this way, the interest in the variable display can be increased by control corresponding to the presence or absence of high base control and the special symbol whose display result is a "jackpot".

In the jackpot control example AKC12, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is set to "10" is the case of jackpot type KA15. For other jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA14, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is less than "10". Jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15 can all be determined in response to "Yes", where high base control is performed, and the start port winning designated value "2", where a special game using the second special symbol is played. In this way, the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol becoming "jackpot" during the high base such as the time-saving state in which the high base control is performed includes the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 which is a 10-round jackpot, and the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and KA12 to KA14 which have fewer rounds than the 10-round jackpot. After the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 ends, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". In contrast, after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA14, there are cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state as the first state based on a setting of "70", and cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state as the second state based on a setting of "10000". As a result, when the second jackpot game state is in a state with a small number of rounds, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a low-probability, high-base state as the second state with a large number of rounds, which prevents the player from being disadvantaged and increases the game interest regarding the variable display.

In the jackpot control example AKC12, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "10" in the case of the jackpot type KA15, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "07" in the case of the jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "04" in the case of the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. Of these, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot types NA10 and KA13 corresponds to the third jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the second jackpot game state. The jackpot types NA10, NA11 and the jackpot types KA13 to KA15 can be determined in accordance with "Yes" where high base control is performed and the start-port prize-winning designated value "2" where the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed. In this way, the jackpot game state that can be controlled based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol becoming "jackpot" during the high base such as the time-saving state where high base control is performed includes the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 which is a 10-round jackpot, the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA11, KA14 which are 7-round jackpots with fewer rounds than the 10-round jackpot, and the third jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10, KA13 which are 4-round jackpots with fewer rounds than the 7-round jackpot. After the first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 ends, the time-saving counter initial value may be controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and there is no case where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". On the other hand, after the second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 and the jackpot types KA13 and KA14 ends, there are cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state based on the setting of "70", and cases where the time-saving counter initial value is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000". The high base determination rate of the jackpot type KA13 is 25%, which is lower than the high base determination rate of the jackpot type KA14, which is 31%. On the other hand, the high base determination rates of the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 are both 2%. Therefore, after the end of the third jackpot game state corresponding to a four-round jackpot, the second state can be controlled to a low-probability, high-base state based on the setting of the time-saving counter initial value of "10,000" at a higher rate than after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to a seven-round jackpot. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged and increases the interest in the variable display by increasing the rate at which the second state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state with a large time-saving counter initial value when the third jackpot game state has a small number of rounds.

In the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8, when the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H], if the jackpot type is either NA10 or KA13, table TB32 is designated as the fluctuation pattern type selection table, and if the jackpot type is either NA11 or KA14, table TB33 is designated as the fluctuation pattern type selection table. Table TB32 shown in FIG. 9-11 (F) can select only fluctuation pattern type CB3-3. Table TB33 shown in FIG. 9-11 (G) can select only fluctuation pattern type CB3-4. In this way, in the case of a 4-round jackpot corresponding to jackpot type NA10 and jackpot type KA13, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table in fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 9-15 (C). In addition, in the case of a 7-round jackpot corresponding to the jackpot type NA11 and the jackpot type KA14, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 9-15 (D). Therefore, in the case of being controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the second jackpot game state corresponding to the 7-round jackpot and in the case of being controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state, the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the common fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 can be used to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in the case of being controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the third jackpot game state corresponding to the 4-round jackpot and in the case of being controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state, the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the common fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 can be used to determine the fluctuation pattern. Here, the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 corresponds to the first data, and the table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table in the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 corresponds to the second data. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using data corresponding to a common fluctuation pattern type, the commonality of the variable display is increased, making it difficult to distinguish whether the state is a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, thereby improving the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-30 (C) shows a jackpot presentation control example AKC13 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA15. In the jackpot presentation control example AKC13, as in the jackpot control example AKC12, the number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "10" for jackpot type KA15, the number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "07" for jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and the number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "04" for jackpot types NA10 and KA13. Among these, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type NA11, KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state in the case of the jackpot type NA10, KA13 corresponds to the third jackpot game state which has fewer rounds than the second jackpot game state. In the jackpot start setting example AKB02 shown in Figure 9-21, the jackpot start performance pattern is set to a common pattern APA33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10, KA13, and a common pattern APA34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11, KA14, respectively. Therefore, when the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot is started, the jackpot start performance can be executed by the common jackpot start performance pattern APA34 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot is started, the jackpot start performance can be executed by the common jackpot start performance pattern APA33 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, by executing the jackpot start performance by the common jackpot start performance pattern, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state when the jackpot start performance is executed, and the game interest regarding the variable display can be improved.

In the jackpot performance control example AKC13, the jackpot performance pattern is set to a common pattern APB33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and to a common pattern APB34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. Therefore, in the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot, when the jackpot game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance using the common jackpot performance pattern APB34. Also, in the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot, when the jackpot game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to execute a jackpot performance using the common jackpot performance pattern APB33. The jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB33 and the jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB34 may include performances executed corresponding to rounds that can be executed corresponding to the respective jackpot game states. Therefore, when a round is executed in the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot, the common jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB34 can be executed in the cases where the game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and where the game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when a round is executed in the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot, the common jackpot performance by the jackpot performance pattern APB33 can be executed in the cases where the game state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and where the game state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, by executing the jackpot performance using a common jackpot performance pattern, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the jackpot performance will result in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, thereby increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

In the jackpot performance control example AKC13, the jackpot end performance pattern is set to a common pattern APC33 corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and to a common pattern APC34 corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. Therefore, when the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot ends, the jackpot end performance can be executed by the common jackpot end performance pattern APC34 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot ends, the jackpot end performance can be executed by the common jackpot end performance pattern APC33 in the case where the state is controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the second jackpot game state corresponding to a 7-round jackpot ends, it is possible to execute a jackpot end effect using a common jackpot end effect pattern APC34 in the case where the state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. Also, when the third jackpot game state corresponding to a 4-round jackpot ends, it is possible to execute a jackpot end effect using a common jackpot end effect pattern APB33 in the case where the state is controlled to a high-probability high base state as the first state after the end of the jackpot game state and in the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, by executing a jackpot end effect using a common jackpot end effect pattern, it is difficult to recognize whether the state is a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state when the jackpot end effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-31 shows a variable display control example AKC21 in which the special chart display result is based on "jackpot" when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H] or 08 [H]. In the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in Figure 9-8, when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], the variable pattern type selection table is specified as table TB31 corresponding to jackpot types NA09, KA12, table TB32 corresponding to jackpot types NA10, KA13, table TB33 corresponding to jackpot types NA11, KA14, and table TB34 corresponding to jackpot type KA15. Also, in the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8, when the presentation state selection designation value is 08 [H], the variation pattern type selection table is designated as table TB35 corresponding to jackpot types NA09 and KA12, table TB36 corresponding to jackpot types NA10 and KA13, table TB37 corresponding to jackpot types NA11 and KA14, and table TB38 corresponding to jackpot type KA15.

Table TB31 shown in FIG. 9-11 (E) and table TB35 shown in FIG. 9-11 (I) are only capable of selecting the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2. Table TB32 shown in FIG. 9-11 (F) and table TB36 shown in FIG. 9-11 (J) are only capable of selecting the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3. Table TB33 shown in FIG. 9-11 (G) and table TB37 shown in FIG. 9-11 (K) are only capable of selecting the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4. Table TB34 shown in FIG. 9-11 (H) and table TB38 shown in FIG. 9-11 (L) are only capable of selecting the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB3-2 shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), it is possible to determine either the fluctuation pattern PB3-1 or PB3-2. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB3-3 shown in FIG. 9-15(C) and the fluctuation pattern type CB3-4 shown in FIG. 9-15(D), it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. In the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB3-5 shown in FIG. 9-15(E), it can be determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11.

In the variable display control example AKC21, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "10" for jackpot type KA15, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "07" for jackpot types NA11 and KA14, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "04" for jackpot types NA10 and KA13, and the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "02" for jackpot types NA09 and KA12. Among these, the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is KA15 corresponds to the first jackpot game state, the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is NA10, NA11, KA13, KA14 corresponds to the second jackpot game state with fewer rounds than the first jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is NA09, KA12 can correspond to the third jackpot game state with fewer rounds than the second jackpot game state. The jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 can all be determined in response to "Yes" where high base control is performed and the start port winning designated value "2" where the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed. In this way, during a high base such as a time-saving state in which high base control is being performed, the jackpot game states that can be controlled based on the special symbol display result of the special symbol game using the second special symbol becoming a "jackpot" include a first jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot type KA15, which is a 10-round jackpot, a second jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA11, KA14, which are 7-round jackpots with fewer rounds than a 10-round jackpot, or jackpot types NA10, KA13, which are 4-round jackpots, and a third jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types NA09, KA12, which are 2-round jackpots with fewer rounds than a 7-round jackpot or 4-round jackpot.

The variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state are variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA10, NA11, KA13, and KA14. If the jackpot type is either NA10 or NA11, control is possible to a low-probability, high-base state as the second state based on the time-saving counter initial value being set to "10000" after the end of the second jackpot game state. In contrast, the variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state are variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12. Then, if the jackpot type is NA09, the time-saving counter initial value can be controlled to a low-probability high-base state as the second state based on the setting of "10000" after the end of the third jackpot game state. The variation pattern PB3-1 included in the variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to such a jackpot type NA09 has a special chart variation time of 2500 milliseconds, and has a shorter variable display period than the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8 included in the variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11. In other words, the variation patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8 included in the variation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and NA11 have a longer variable display time than the variation pattern PB3-1 included in the variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot type NA09. As a result, when the variable display period is a long variation pattern, the expectation of being controlled to the second jackpot game state in which the number of rounds is greater than the third jackpot game state is increased, and the game interest regarding the variable display can be improved.

Fluctuation pattern PB3-2, which is included in the fluctuation pattern that can be determined in response to jackpot type NA09, is also included in the fluctuation pattern that can be determined in response to jackpot types NA10 and NA11. In the case of jackpot type NA09, after the end of a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state, it is possible to control to a low-probability high base state as the second state. In the case of jackpot types NA10 and NA11, after the end of a 4-round jackpot or a 7-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state, it is possible to control to a low-probability high base state as the second state. In this way, a common fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation pattern PB3-2 can be determined in the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of a 4-round jackpot or a 7-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state, and the case where the state is controlled to a low-probability high base state as the second state after the end of a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state. This makes it difficult to tell whether the game will enter the second or third jackpot game state when the fluctuation pattern results in a specific variable display period, thereby increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

In response to the end of a jackpot game state based on a second special jackpot during a high base, the special period performance designation value is set to 0E [H] if the jackpot type is NA09-NA11 and the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000" and there is no V win, and the special period performance designation value is set to 0E [H] if the jackpot type is KA12-KA15 and the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70" and there is a V win, the special period performance designation value is set to 07 [H]. The high probability high base state where the time-saving counter initial value is "70" corresponds to the first state, and the low probability high base state where the time-saving counter initial value is "10000" corresponds to the second state. Data indicating the special period performance designation value is stored and memorized in the special period performance buffer. In the example of the setting AKB12 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-24, when there is no V win in the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, command data indicating command 9505 [H] as the background designation after the jackpot is stored in the background designation command buffer or the like and can be sent. In the example of the setting AKB13 at the end of the jackpot shown in FIG. 9-25, when there is a V win in the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, command data indicating command 9506 [H] as the background designation after the jackpot is stored in the background designation command buffer or the like and can be sent. When command 9505 [H] is sent as the background designation command and when command 9506 [H] is sent, the background may be displayed using a common performance image in response to the high base being in a time-saving state or a high-variable state in which high-base control is being performed.

As described above, data indicating a special period effect designation value that serves as counting information can be set in response to the end of a jackpot gaming state, and 07 [H] is set as the special period effect designation value when controlled to a high probability high base state as the first state, and 0E [H] is set as the special period effect designation value when controlled to a low probability high base state as the second state. Also, during the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state, and during the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state, a background display using a common effect image based on a background designation command is possible. In this way, by making it difficult to recognize whether the state is in a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state based on the display of the effect image that serves as a common background image, it is possible to increase the interest in the variable display.

In response to the end of the jackpot game state based on the second special jackpot during a high base, the presentation state selection designated value is set to 06 [H], which is a common value for jackpot types NA09-NA11 and KA12-KA15. After that, during the low-probability high base state based on jackpot types NA09-NA11, the presentation state selection designated value is updated to 08 [H], and during the high-probability high base state based on jackpot types KA12-KA15, the presentation state selection designated value is updated to 07 [H]. When the presentation state selection designated value is 06 [H], the special chart display result corresponds to a "miss," and reference table TS02 is specified in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). When the performance state selection designation value is 07 [H], the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS03 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). When the performance state selection designation value is 08 [H], the special chart display result corresponds to "miss", and the reference table TS04 is designated in the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). When the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS03 shown in FIG. 9-6 (D) can designate either table TB22 or TB23 as the variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the second reserved memory number. When the start port winning designation value is "2", the reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6 (E) can designate either table TB24 or TB25 as the variation pattern type selection table corresponding to the second reserved memory number. In the case of table TB22 shown in FIG. 9-10(I) and table TB23 shown in FIG. 9-10(J), and in the case of table TB24 shown in FIG. 9-10(K) and table TB25 shown in FIG. 9-10(L), the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2 to CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be determined. In particular, the fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be determined regardless of whether any of tables TB22 to TB25 is specified.

As described above, when the number of variable displays is less than the first number of "70" during a high-probability, high base state corresponding to the first state and during a low-probability, high base state corresponding to the second state, it is possible to determine the variable pattern using table data of a variable pattern determination table that serves as common determination data corresponding to, for example, the variable pattern types CB1-4, CB2-1, etc. In this way, since the variable pattern is determined using common determination data, it is possible to increase the commonality of the variable display and make it difficult to recognize whether the state is in a high-probability, high base state or a low-probability, high base state, thereby improving the interest in the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC21, the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type can be obtained from the special chart fluctuation time and the determination ratio of the determinable pattern corresponding to each jackpot type. More specifically, the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type can be obtained by multiplying the special chart fluctuation time and the determination ratio for each determinable pattern and adding the value for the multiple determinable patterns corresponding to the jackpot type. For example, the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12 is 3900 milliseconds, the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13 is 16190 milliseconds, the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14 is 16740 milliseconds, and the average fluctuation time corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 is 20960 milliseconds. The fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state are the fluctuation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that can be determined corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state are the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA10, NA11, KA13, and KA14. The variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state are the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 that can be determined in response to the jackpot types NA09 and KA12. In this way, the average variation time of 20960 milliseconds in the multiple variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state is set to be longer than the average variation times of 16740 milliseconds and 16190 milliseconds in the multiple variation patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state. In addition, the average change time in the multiple change patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state is set so that the variable display period is longer than the average change time of 3900 milliseconds in the multiple change patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state. This increases the expectation of being controlled to the second jackpot game state, which has more rounds than the third jackpot game state, when the variable display period is a long change pattern, and also increases the expectation of being controlled to the first jackpot game state, which has more rounds than the second jackpot game state, thereby improving the game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-32 shows variable display control example AKC22 for the variable display that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state when the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H] or 08 [H]. In variable display control example AKC22, the average fluctuation time for the entire variation pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to the jackpot gaming state is shown. The average fluctuation time for such an entire variation pattern can be obtained from the average fluctuation time corresponding to each jackpot type obtained in variable display control example AKC21 and the high base determination rate of each jackpot type. More specifically, the average fluctuation time for the entire variation pattern can be obtained by adding the value obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time for each jackpot type and the determination rate for all jackpot types. As a result, in variable display control example AKC22, the average fluctuation time for the entire variation pattern is 12650 milliseconds. In this case, the average fluctuation time of 20960 milliseconds in the multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state is set to be longer than the average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds for the whole. Also, the average fluctuation times of 16740 milliseconds and 16190 milliseconds in the multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 7-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state are set to be longer than the average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds for the whole. On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of 3900 milliseconds in the multiple fluctuation patterns that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that triggers control to a 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state is set to be shorter than the average fluctuation time of 12650 milliseconds for the whole. This increases the expectation that the game will be controlled to the second jackpot game state, which has a greater number of rounds than the third jackpot game state, when the variable display period is a long fluctuation pattern, and also increases the expectation that the game will be controlled to the first jackpot game state, which has a greater number of rounds than the second jackpot game state, thereby improving game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-33 (A) shows a variable display control example AKC31 corresponding to the presentation state selection designation values 07 [H], 08 [H], 0C [H], and 0D [H]. When the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. When the presentation state selection designation value is 08 [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. And the variation pattern type CB2-1 includes the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 as determinable variation patterns.

In the example of a miss variation pattern shown in Figure 9-4, variation pattern PB2-2 executes a reach performance of Super Reach SPE, which becomes the second variable display performance during the variable display, and the special chart variation time is 16,500 milliseconds. In contrast, variation pattern PB2-3 executes a reach performance of Super Reach SPF, which becomes the first variable display performance during the variable display, and the special chart variation time is 35,500 milliseconds. Also, in the example of a jackpot variation pattern shown in Figure 9-5, the reach performance of Super Reach SPE, which becomes the second variable display performance, is executed during the variable display of variation pattern PB3-3, and the reach performance of Super Reach SPF, which becomes the first variable display performance, is executed during the variable display of variation pattern PB3-4. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 9-14(J) or the fluctuation pattern type CB2-2 shown in FIG. 9-14(K), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB2-3 is set to be lower than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern CB4-4 shown in FIG. 9-16(D) or the fluctuation pattern type CB4-5 shown in FIG. 9-16(E), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB3-4 is set to be higher than the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB3-3. With such a setting, the reach performance of the Super Reach SPF, which is the first variable display performance, is controlled to a jackpot game state at a high rate, and the reach performance of the Super Reach SPE, which is the second variable display performance, is controlled to a jackpot game state at a lower rate than the reach performance of the Super Reach SPF.

In the variable display control example AKC31, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0C [H], the game state is a high probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variable pattern type CB1-8 can be selected, and when the special chart display result corresponds to "jackpot", the variable pattern type CB4-1, CB4-2 can be selected. Also, when the presentation state selection designation value is 0D [H], the game state is a low probability high base state, and the special chart display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, corresponds to "miss", and the variable pattern type CB1-9 can be selected, and when the special chart display result corresponds to "jackpot", the variable pattern type CB4-1, CB4-2 can be selected. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern type is CB1-8, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB1-8, when the fluctuation pattern type is CB1-9, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB1-9, when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-1, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-2, and when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-2, it can be determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-9.

The special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 corresponding to the second special pattern is 16,500 milliseconds, and is set so that the variable display period is shorter than the special chart fluctuation time of 35,500 milliseconds of the fluctuation pattern PB2-3 corresponding to the first special pattern. Also, in response to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is the first number of times "70", it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 when the special chart display result is a "miss", and it is possible to determine the fluctuation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 when the special chart display result is a "jackpot". The special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB1-8 is 12,500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is 4,500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is 11,500 milliseconds, so all of these are set to have a shorter variable display period than the special chart fluctuation time of 16,500 milliseconds of the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 corresponding to the second special pattern. This allows the variable display by the fluctuation pattern capable of executing the result display that is a value notification to be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

Corresponding to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is the first number of times, 70, the variation patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" are the first pattern, and the variation pattern PB1-8 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "miss" is the second pattern. The special chart variation time of variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, the special chart variation time of variation pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, and the special chart variation time of variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds. All of these variation patterns are set so that the variable display period is shorter than the special chart variation time of 16500 milliseconds of variation pattern PB2-2 that executes the reach performance of the Super Reach SPE, which is the second variable display performance. This allows the player to appropriately execute the variable display according to the variation pattern PB1-8, which executes the result display that notifies the player of value, thereby increasing the player's interest in the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC31, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2 can be determined when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-1. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-1 can be selected when the table TB40 shown in FIG. 9-12 (A) is specified. The table TB40 can be specified in accordance with the jackpot type NA09-NA11 and the jackpot type KA12-KA14 when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H] or 0D [H], according to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. However, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H] or 0D [H], the jackpot types NA08 and KA11 are not determined. In contrast, the fluctuation pattern PB3-9 can be determined when the fluctuation pattern type is CB4-2. The fluctuation pattern type CB4-2 can be selected when the table TB41 shown in FIG. 9-12 (B) is specified. Table TB41 can be specified in accordance with jackpot type KA15 when the presentation state selection designation value is 0C [H] or 0D [H] according to the jackpot reference table TS21 shown in FIG. 9-8. Therefore, when the variation pattern PB3-9 is selected, it can be controlled to a 10-round jackpot corresponding to jackpot type KA15, and when the variation pattern PB3-2 is selected, it can be controlled to a 2-round jackpot, 4-round jackpot, or 7-round jackpot corresponding to jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and jackpot types KA12 to KA14.

In accordance with the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during special states such as a high probability high base state and a low probability low base state is the first number of times, which is "70," among the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "jackpot," fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is the third pattern, and fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is the fourth pattern. These third and fourth patterns are included in the first pattern. Furthermore, fluctuation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "miss" are the second pattern. The special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is 4,500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB3-9 is 11,500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-8 is 12,500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern PB1-9 is 29,900 milliseconds. Therefore, the variable display period of the third pattern, variable pattern PB3-2, and the fourth pattern, variable pattern PB3-9, is set to be shorter than the variable display periods of the second pattern, variable patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9. This increases the sense of surprise when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" in the variable display where the result display, which is a value notification, is executed, and increases the interest in the variable display.

In response to the first number of executions of the variable display during a special state such as a high-probability high base state or a low-probability low base state being "70", the variable patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 that can be determined when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" are special variable display patterns. In response to the first number of executions of the variable display during a special state such as a high-probability high base state or a low-probability low base state being less than "70", the jackpot game state that can be controlled when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" includes a first jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15 which is a 10-round jackpot, and a second jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA11, KA14 which is a 7-round jackpot with fewer rounds than a 10-round jackpot, or the jackpot type NA10, KA13 which is a 4-round jackpot, or the jackpot type NA09, KA12 which is a 2-round jackpot. The variable patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state are the variable patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that can be determined in response to the jackpot type KA15. These variable patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 are included in multiple specific variable display patterns.

In the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 9-31, the average fluctuation time in the multiple variable patterns that can be determined in response to the variable display that triggers control to a 10-round jackpot as the first jackpot game state is 20960 milliseconds. In contrast, the special chart fluctuation time of the variable pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time of the variable pattern PB3-9 is 11500 milliseconds, and both are set so that the variable display period is shorter than 20960 milliseconds. In this way, the variable display patterns PB3-2 and PB3-9 that become the special variable display patterns are set so that the variable display period is shorter than the average fluctuation time in the variable display patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11 that become the multiple specific variable display patterns. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the variable display in which the result display that notifies value is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

In the variable display control example AKC31, the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state corresponds to the first number of times of "70", and when the special chart display result is a "miss", the variation pattern types CB1-8 and CB1-9 can be selected, and when the special chart display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB1-8, only the variation pattern PB1-8 can be determined, in the case of the variation pattern type CB1-9, only the variation pattern PB1-9 can be determined, in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-1, only the variation pattern PB3-2 can be determined, and in the case of the variation pattern type CB4-2, only the variation pattern PB3-9 can be determined. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 correspond to the specific determination data. In this way, when a result display that is a value notification is executed in response to the 70th variable display during a special state, the total number of variable patterns that can be determined using the specific determination data is "4." In contrast, when the number of times that the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is less than the first number of "70," the variable pattern type CB2-1 can be selected when the special chart display result is "miss."

In the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 9-31, in response to the fact that the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability low base state is less than "70" as the first number, when the special chart display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB2-1, either variation pattern PB2-2 or PB2-3 can be determined. In the case of the variation pattern types CB3-2 to CB3-5, any one of the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-11 can be determined overall. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB2-1 and CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponds to the normal determination data. In this way, in response to the variable display before the 70th time during the special state, the total number of variation patterns that can be determined using the normal determination data is "13". Therefore, the total number of variable patterns that can be determined when a result display that notifies value is executed is smaller than the total number of variable patterns that can be determined during the previous special state. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the data capacity required to execute a variable display that executes a result display that notifies value, while improving gameplay interest in the variable display.

The high-probability high base state, which corresponds to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 and can be controlled until 70 variable displays corresponding to the first number of times are executed when the time-saving counter initial value is "70" after the jackpot game state ends, corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability high base state, which corresponds to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and can be controlled until 10,000 variable displays corresponding to the second number of times "10,000" which is greater than the first number after the jackpot game state ends, corresponds to the second state. The high-probability high base state corresponding to the first state has a higher probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state, and variable displays are more likely to be executed compared to the normal state due to high base control. The low-probability high base state corresponding to the second state has the same probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state as the normal state, and variable displays are more likely to be executed compared to the normal state due to high base control. During the low probability high base state, which is the second state, the presentation state selection designated value corresponds to 08 [H] until the count value of the time-saving counter reaches "9931", and if the special chart display result is "miss", the reference table TS04 is specified by the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6 (A). The table data constituting the reference table TS04 corresponds to the first determination data. Also, when the count value of the time-saving counter reaches "9930", the presentation state selection designated value corresponds to 0E [H], and if the special chart display result is "miss", the reference table TS02 is specified by the miss reference table AKA01. The table data constituting the reference table TS02 corresponds to the second determination data.

Reference table TS04 shown in FIG. 9-6(E) allows any one of tables TB10, TB24, TB25 to be designated as the fluctuation pattern type determination table in accordance with the start port winning designated value and the first and second reserved memory counts. Reference table TS02 shown in FIG. 9-6(C) allows any one of tables TB10, TB20, TB21 to be designated as the fluctuation pattern type determination table in accordance with the start port winning designated value and the first and second reserved memory counts. Table TB20 shown in FIG. 9-10(G) allows only fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 to be selected, and table TB21 shown in FIG. 9-10(H) allows only fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 to be selected. In contrast, in the table TB24 shown in FIG. 9-10(K), the fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be selected in addition to the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2, and in the table TB25 shown in FIG. 9-10(L), the fluctuation pattern types CB1-4 and CB2-1 can be selected in addition to the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-2 shown in FIG. 9-14(B), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 can be determined, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-3 shown in FIG. 9-14(C), only the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 can be determined. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB1-4 shown in FIG. 9-14(D), the fluctuation patterns PB1-4 and PB1-5 can be determined, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 shown in FIG. 9-14(J), any one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 can be determined.

In the example configuration of the miss fluctuation pattern shown in Figure 9-4, the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is 3500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB1-3 is 500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB1-4 is 500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB1-5 is 2000 milliseconds. Also, the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB2-1 is 3500 milliseconds, the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB2-2 is 16500 milliseconds, and the special chart fluctuation time for fluctuation pattern PB2-3 is 35500 milliseconds. In this way, when the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data is used, the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected, whereas when the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is used, the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 is not selected. Therefore, the variable display pattern that can be determined using the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is set to have a shorter average variable display period than the variable display pattern that can be determined using the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data. As a result, the variable display during the low probability high base corresponding to the second state can be performed quickly after exceeding the first number of times, "70", by appropriately performing the variable display, thereby improving the game interest regarding the variable display.

When the reference table TS04 corresponding to the first determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected, and the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-3 that can be determined in the case of the variation pattern type CB2-1 are variation patterns that can execute a reach effect after the variable display becomes a reach state. In particular, the variation pattern PB2-2 can execute the reach effect of the super reach SPE, and the variation pattern PB2-3 can execute the reach effect of the super reach SPF. The reach effects of the super reach SPE and SPF correspond to specific effects, and the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 correspond to the effect variable display pattern. When the reference table TS02 corresponding to the second determination data is used, the variation pattern type CB2-1 is not selected, so the variation patterns that can be determined using the reference table TS02 do not include the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 that correspond to the effect variable display pattern. This allows the variable display to be appropriately executed during the low probability high base corresponding to the second state, and increases the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-33 (B) shows a variable display control example AKC32 based on a different viewpoint corresponding to the presentation state selection designated values 07 [H], 08 [H], 0C [H], and 0D [H]. As with the variable display control example AKC21 shown in Figure 9-31, if the presentation state selection designated value corresponds to 07 [H] and 08 [H], and the special chart display result is "jackpot" with jackpot types NA09 and KA12, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is set to "02", and only the variation pattern type CB3-2 can be selected. In the case of the variation pattern type CB3-2, it is possible to determine either the variation pattern PB3-1 or PB3-2. A two-round jackpot with the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened being "02" corresponds to the first type advantageous state, and the variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 correspond to the first type variable display pattern. Also, if the presentation state selection designation value corresponds to 07 [H] or 08 [H], and the special chart display result is "jackpot" with jackpot type NA10 or KA13, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is set to "04", and only the variation pattern type CB3-3 can be selected. In the case of variation pattern type CB3-3, it is possible to determine one of the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8. A 4-round jackpot with the maximum number of times the large prize opening is "04" corresponds to the second type advantageous state, and variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 correspond to the second type variable display pattern.

In the variable display control example AKC31 shown in FIG. 9-33(A), when the performance state selection designation value is 0C[H], if the special chart display result is a "miss", only the variation pattern type CB1-8 can be selected, and when the performance state selection designation value is 0D[H], if the special chart display result is a "miss", only the variation pattern type CB1-9 can be selected. Also, when the performance state selection designation value is 0C[H], 0D[H], if the special chart display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern types CB4-1 and CB4-2 can be selected. In this way, when a result display that is a value notification is executed in response to the 70th variable display during the special state, it is possible to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 corresponds to the specific determination data.

In the variable display control example AKC31 shown in FIG. 9-33(A), if the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H] or 08 [H] and the special chart display result is "miss", only the variation pattern type CB2-1 can be selected. Also, in the variable display control example AKC21 shown in FIG. 9-31, if the presentation state selection designation value is 07 [H] or 08 [H] and the special chart display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern type CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponding to the jackpot type can be selected. In this way, it is possible to determine a variation pattern corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 in response to the variable display before the 70th time during the special state. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table in the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 corresponds to the normal determination data, and the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 correspond to the notification variable display pattern.

The variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 corresponding to the first type variable display pattern and the variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8 corresponding to the second type variable display pattern each include the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to the type common variable display pattern. The special chart variation time of the variation pattern PB3-2 is 4500 milliseconds. In addition, among the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 corresponding to the notification variable display pattern, the special chart variation time of the variation pattern PB1-8 is 12500 milliseconds, and the special chart variation time of the variation pattern PB1-9 is 29900 milliseconds. Therefore, the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to the type common variable pattern is set so that the variable display period is shorter than the variation patterns PB1-8 and PB1-9 corresponding to the notification variable display pattern. By using the variation pattern PB3-2 corresponding to such a type common variable pattern, the increase in the variation pattern corresponding to the special chart display result "jackpot" is suppressed, so that the increase in the data capacity can be prevented. In addition, the variable display period is shortened in the case of the variable pattern PB3-2, which corresponds to the type-common variable pattern, so that the sense of surprise when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" in the variable display is increased, and the interest in the game regarding the variable display can be improved.

In step AKS502 of the effect pattern change start processing shown in FIG. 9-26, if the number of executions of the variable display corresponding to the probability change state or the time-saving state reaches 70 times and the change pattern is PB3-2, it may be determined that the change pattern is for result display. In this case, the result display control setting is performed by step AKS503. Based on this setting, in step AKS525 of the effect pattern change processing shown in FIG. 9-27, control is performed to execute the result display, and the result display can be executed as a value notification that notifies the player of the result of the value acquired. The change pattern PB3-2 can be determined in correspondence with the jackpot types NA09, KA12 and the jackpot types NA10, KA13 regardless of whether the effect state selection designated value is 0C[H] or 0D[H]. Such a change pattern corresponds to a common variable display pattern. In the case of the jackpot type NA09, after the 2-round jackpot as the third jackpot game state is completed, it can be controlled to the low-probability high base state as the second state. In the case of the jackpot type NA10, after the 4-round jackpot as the second jackpot game state is completed, it can be controlled to the low-probability high base state as the second state. Therefore, when the variation pattern PB3-2 is determined in response to the execution number of the variable display during the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state being the first number of times of "70", a result display that is a value notification is executed during the variable display, and after the jackpot game state is completed, whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 4-round jackpot, it is possible to provide a case where it is controlled to the low-probability high base state corresponding to the second state. Since it is possible to determine a common variation pattern such as the variation pattern PB3-2, it is difficult to recognize whether the game state is the second jackpot game state or the third jackpot game state in the case of the variable display in which the result display that is a value notification is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest regarding the variable display.

Figure 9-34 shows a presentation state control example AKC41 based on a different perspective corresponding to the second special chart jackpot during a high base. When the second special chart jackpot during a high base is of jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the jackpot type is included in "probable change", so a V win is more likely to occur. On the other hand, when the jackpot game state ends without a V win occurring, the presentation state is controlled differently from when a V win occurs. In the jackpot end setting example AKB13 shown in Figure 9-25, if there is no V win of jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the special period presentation designation value is set to 08 [H]. In this way, in the case where there is no V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the time-saving counter initial value "70" and the presentation state selection designated value 06 [H] corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15 are set in the jackpot end setting AKB11 shown in FIG. 9-23. However, since there is no V win, the probability variable counter initial value is set to "0", and the game is controlled to a low probability high base state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the example of the control of the performance state AKC41, when the second special chart jackpot during the high base is of the jackpot type KA12 to KA15, the special performance period designation value is set to 08 [H] in response to the absence of a V prize, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "70", and the performance state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the time-saving counter count value is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period performance update setting is performed. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special performance period designation value is 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "66", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 08 [H], when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 0C [H], and when the time-saving counter count value becomes "0", the performance state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized. In contrast, if the second special chart jackpot during the high base is of jackpot type KA12 to KA15, and there is a V win, the count value of the time-saving counter can be updated to the corresponding presentation state selection designated value, similar to the presentation state control example AKC02 shown in Figure 9-29.

In this way, if the special performance period designation value is set to 08 [H] in response to no V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was of jackpot type KA12-KA15, the performance state selection designation value will be 08 [H] during the period when the time-saving counter count value is from "66" to "1". In contrast, if the special performance period designation value is set to 07 [H] in response to V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was of jackpot type KA12-KA15, the performance state selection designation value will be 07 [H] during the period when the time-saving counter count value is from "66" to "1". On the other hand, when the time-saving counter count value becomes "1", the performance state selection designation value will be updated to 0C [H] regardless of whether or not a V win has occurred.

In the miss reference table AKA01 shown in FIG. 9-6(A), when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], reference table TS03 is designated, and when the presentation state selection designated value is 08 [H], reference table TS04 is designated. When the presentation state selection designated value is 0C [H], reference table TS08 is designated. The table data constituting reference table TS03 corresponds to the first special determination data, the table data constituting reference table TS04 corresponds to the second special determination data, and the table data constituting reference table TS08 corresponds to the third special determination data. Thus, in a low probability high base state that can be controlled when there is no V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting reference table TS04 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than the first number of times, "70". In contrast, in a high-probability high base state that can be controlled when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15, the variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS03 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than "70" as the first number. In addition, in a case where the number of times the variable display is executed in a low-probability high base state is "70" as the first number, and in a case where the number of times the variable display is executed in a high-probability high base state is "70" as the first number, the variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS08 in response to the case where the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number during a low-probability high base state or a high-probability high base state that is a special state, the variation pattern can be determined using the reference table TS08 corresponding to the third special determination data, thereby preventing an increase in data capacity. Furthermore, if the number of times the variable display has been performed is less than the first number of times, which is "70," different determination data can be used to determine the variation pattern, allowing the variable display to be appropriately performed up to the first number of times, thereby increasing the interest in the variable display.

Figure 9-35 shows a presentation state control example AKC42 based on a different viewpoint corresponding to the second special chart jackpot during a high base. When the second special chart jackpot during a high base is of the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the jackpot type is included in "normal", so V winning is less likely to occur. On the other hand, when a V winning occurs and the jackpot game state ends, the presentation state is controlled to be different from when a V winning does not occur. In the jackpot end time setting example AKB12 shown in Figure 9-24, if there is a V winning of the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special period presentation designation value is set to 0D [H]. In this way, when there is a V winning in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, in the jackpot end time setting AKB11 shown in Figure 9-23, the time-saving counter initial value "10000" corresponding to the jackpot type NA09 to NA11 and the presentation state selection designation value 06 [H] are set. Furthermore, in response to a V win, the initial value of the probability change counter is set to "70", so the game is controlled to a high probability high base state after the big win game state ends.

In the example of the control of the presentation state AKC42, when the second special chart jackpot during the high base is of the jackpot type NA09 to NA11, the special presentation period designation value is set to 0D [H] in response to the presence of a V win, the time-saving counter initial value is set to "10000", and the presentation state selection designation value is set to 06 [H]. After that, the count value of the time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in response to the end of the variable display, and the special period presentation update setting is performed. In the special period effect setting table AKT01 shown in FIG. 9-19, when the special effect period designation value is 0D [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "9996", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 07 [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "9931", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0D [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "9930", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 0E [H], when the time-saving counter count value is "0", the effect state selection designation value is updated to 00 [H] and initialized. On the other hand, when the high base second special chart jackpot is a jackpot type NA09 to NA11, if there is no V winning, it can be updated to the effect state selection designation value corresponding to the time-saving counter count value, as in the example of the effect state control AKC02 shown in FIG. 9-29.

In this way, if the special period performance designation value is set to 0D [H] in response to a V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was a jackpot type NA09-NA11, the performance state selection designation value will be 07 [H] during the period from "9996" to "9931" when the time-saving counter count value is "9996" to "9931" when the special period performance designation value is set to 0E [H] in response to no V win based on the fact that the second special chart jackpot during the high base was a jackpot type NA09-NA11, the performance state selection designation value will be 08 [H] during the period from "9996" to "9931". On the other hand, when the time-saving counter count value becomes "9931", the performance state selection designation value will be updated to 0D [H] regardless of whether or not a V win has occurred. Furthermore, when the time-saving counter reaches 9930, the presentation state selection designation value is updated to 0E [H] regardless of whether or not a V win occurs.

In the miss reference table AKA01 shown in Figure 9-6 (A), reference table TS03 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 07 [H], and reference table TS04 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 08 [H]. Furthermore, reference table TS09 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 0D [H], and reference table TS02 is specified when the presentation state selection designated value is 0E [H]. The table data constituting reference table TS03 corresponds to the first special decision data, the table data constituting reference table TS04 corresponds to the second special decision data, the table data constituting reference table TS09 corresponds to the fourth special decision data, and the table data constituting reference table TS02 corresponds to the common decision data. Thus, in the high-probability high base state that can be controlled when there is a V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS03 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than "70" as the first number. On the other hand, in the low-probability high base state that can be controlled when there is no V win in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS04 in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than "70" as the first number. Then, in response to the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-probability high base state is "70" as the first number and the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the high-probability high base state is "70" as the first number, the variation pattern can be determined using the table data constituting the reference table TS09. Thereafter, in response to the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-probability high base state exceeds "70" as the first number, and the case where the number of times the variable display is executed in the high-probability high base state exceeds "70" as the first number, a variation pattern can be determined using table data constituting the reference table TS02. Therefore, in the case where the number of times the variable display is executed is "70" as the first number or exceeds "70" in the low-probability high base state or the high-probability high base state that is a special state, the variation pattern is determined using the reference table TS09 corresponding to the fourth special determination data or the reference table TS02 corresponding to the common determination data, thereby preventing an increase in data capacity. In addition, in the case where the number of times the variable display is executed is less than "70" as the first number, the variation pattern is determined using different determination data, and the variable display up to the first number can be appropriately executed, thereby improving the interest in the variable display.

Figure 9-36 shows an example of the performance when a result display or a status notification performance is executed. This performance execution example includes a case where the time-saving counter is controlled to a high-probability, high base state in which the initial value is "70" in response to the end of a jackpot game state, and a case where the time-saving counter is controlled to a low-probability, high base state in which the initial value is "10,000". The high-probability, high base state here corresponds to the first state, and the low-probability, high base state corresponds to the second state.

Figure 9-36 (A) shows a performance execution example AK101 during a high-probability high base state or a low-probability high base state in which high base control is being performed, during a period in which the number of times the variable display is executed is less than 70 times as the first number. In performance execution example AK101, a common performance image is used as the background image for the high-probability high base state corresponding to the first state, and the low-probability high base state corresponding to the second state, and a background display is performed as a high base background by displaying it on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 9-36 (B) shows a performance example AK102 in which the number of times the variable display is executed during a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state reaches 70 times as the first number. At this time, if the high probability high base state corresponds to the first state, the variation pattern PB1-8 is determined, and if the low probability high base state corresponds to the second state, the variation pattern PB1-9 is determined. In step AKS502 of the performance pattern variation start processing shown in Figure 9-26, in both cases of the variation pattern PB1-8 and PB1-9, it is determined that the variation pattern is for result display, and the result display control setting is performed by step AKS503. Based on this setting, in the performance execution example AK102, a result display is executed that serves as a value notification that notifies the player of the results of the value acquired by the player, such as the total number of winning balls acquired by the player and the number of so-called consecutive wins.

Figure 9-36 (C) shows an example of performance execution AK103 after the high probability high base state corresponding to the first state ends. In the special period performance setting table AKT01 shown in Figure 9-19, when the count value of the time-saving counter matches the time-saving counter judgment value "0", command 9500 [H] is set to be sendable as a background designation command. Based on receiving this background designation command, the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12 displays the background display as the normal background in the normal state. Also, in the special pattern change processing shown in Figure 9-18, when the count value of the probability counter is judged to be "0" in step AKS127, the probability control in the probability state ends by clearing the probability flag in step AKS128. Also, when the count value of the time-saving counter is judged to be "0" in step AKS131, the high base control in the time-saving state ends by clearing the time-saving flag in step AKS132.

Figures 9-36 (D) to (F) show performance execution examples AK104 to AK106 when the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state continues. Of these, performance execution example AK104 shown in Figure 9-36 (D) and performance execution example AK105 shown in Figure 9-36 (E) are included in the status notification performance that can be executed in response to the fluctuation pattern PB1-9. In step AKS504 of the performance pattern fluctuation start processing shown in Figure 9-26, in the case of fluctuation pattern PB1-9, it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern for status notification performance, and status notification performance control setting is performed by step AKS505. Based on this setting, in performance execution example AK104, button display AKE01 is performed by displaying a performance image showing push button 31B as a specific image on the screen of image display device 5. The presentation image corresponding to button display AKE01 may be hidden while the result display of presentation execution example AK103 is performed in the case of a high probability, high base state corresponding to the first state. In contrast, the presentation image corresponding to button display AKE01 may be displayed in conjunction with the execution of the result display of presentation execution example AK103 in the case of a low probability, high base state corresponding to the second state. By providing appropriate notifications using button display AKE01 in this way, it is possible to increase the interest in playing with the variable display.

After that, it may be possible to execute different status notification effects depending on whether or not a player action, such as a press operation on the push button 31B, has been detected. In the effect execution example AK105, when a press operation on the push button 31B is detected, a notification display is performed by displaying a display image on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the game is in a low probability high base state corresponding to the second state. On the other hand, when a press operation on the push button 31B is not detected, the status notification effect may end with the end of the variable display without executing a notification display.

In the performance execution example AK106, when the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state occurs, the number of times the variable display is executed is 71 times or more, exceeding the first number of times of 70. In this case, a background display is performed as a high base medium background, similar to the performance execution example AK101. This background display makes it easier to recognize that the low probability high base state corresponding to the second state is continuing, and can increase the interest in the variable display.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 23AK)
The gaming machine performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes special state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, variable display pattern determination means capable of determining a variable display pattern, and notification means capable of executing a plurality of types of notifications including a value notification for notifying the result of a value acquired by a player. The special state includes a first state in which the game machine can be controlled until a first number of variable displays are executed after the advantageous state ends, and a second state in which the game machine can be controlled until a second number of variable displays, which is greater than the first number, are executed after the advantageous state ends. The variable display pattern determination means can determine a first variable display pattern in response to the execution number of the variable display in the first state being a first number of times, and can determine a second variable display pattern in response to the execution number of the variable display in the second state being a first number of times, and the notification means executes a value notification during the variable display by the first variable display pattern, executes a value notification and a notification that it is in the second state during the variable display by the second variable display pattern, and the second variable display pattern has a longer variable display period than the first variable display pattern. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. The special state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 of a gaming control microcomputer 100 that executes step AKS166. The variable display pattern determination means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes the variable pattern setting process of step AKS110. The value notification may be, for example, the performance execution example AK102. The notification means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS525 and AKS527. The first number of times may be, for example, "70". The first state may be, for example, a high probability high base state based on any of the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The second number of times may be, for example, "10000". The second state may be, for example, a low probability high base state based on any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. The first variable display pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB1-8. The second variable display pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB1-9. The notification of the second state may be, for example, the performance execution example AK102, AK104, AK105, etc. The variable display period may be, for example, the variable display control example AKC11.
According to such a configuration, the variable display period and the notification contents can be made different between the first variable display pattern and the second variable display pattern, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game relating to the variable display.

[1] A variable display of identification information is provided, and an advantageous state control means is provided that can control the display to an advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, and when the display is controlled to a special state, the display result of the variable display may be controlled to the second state based on the second identification information of the identification information becoming a specific result, and when the display is not controlled to a special state, the display result of the variable display may not be controlled to the second state based on the second identification information of the identification information becoming a specific result, and when the display is controlled to a special state and when the display is not controlled to a special state, the display result of the variable display may not be controlled to the second state based on the first identification information of the identification information becoming a specific result. Here, the advantageous state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a process before the opening of a large prize opening, a process during the opening of a large prize opening, a process after the opening of a large prize opening, and a process to end a large prize. When the display is controlled to the second state, it may be, for example, when a large prize game state corresponding to any one of the large prize types NA09 to NA11 ends.
In such a configuration, the interest in the game regarding the variable display can be increased by controlling the variable display according to whether it is controlled to a special state or not, or according to a specific result.

[2] A variable means capable of changing between a first variable state in which the game medium can enter and a second variable state in which the game medium cannot enter, an advantageous state control means for performing variable display of identification information and controlling the state to an advantageous state when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, and a variable control means capable of executing a predetermined number of unit games that change the variable means to the first variable state in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state that can be controlled based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific result by the second identification information of the identification information when controlled to a special state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the first advantageous state, and after the end of the first advantageous state, there is a case where the device is controlled to the first state and a case where the device is not controlled to the second state, and after the end of the second advantageous state, there may be a case where the device is controlled to the first state and a case where the device is controlled to the second state. Here, the first variable state may be, for example, an open state. The second variable state may be, for example, a closed state. The variable means may be, for example, a special variable winning ball device 50. The advantageous state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a pre-opening process of the large prize opening, a process during the opening of the large prize opening, a process after the opening of the large prize opening, and a jackpot end process. The unit game may be, for example, a round in a jackpot game state. The first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 and KA12 to KA14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage when the second advantageous state occurs in which the number of unit games is small, and to increase the player's interest in the variable display.

[3] The advantageous state that can be controlled based on the display result of the variable display being a specific result by the second identification information among the identification information when controlled to a special state includes a first advantageous state, a second advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the first advantageous state, and a third advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the second advantageous state, and after the end of the first advantageous state, there is a case where it is controlled to the first state, and there is no case where it is controlled to the second state, and after the end of the second advantageous state and the end of the third advantageous state, there is a case where it is controlled to the first state and a case where it is controlled to the second state, and after the end of the third advantageous state, it may be possible to control to the second state at a higher rate than after the end of the second advantageous state. Here, the first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot type KA15. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA11 and KA14. The third advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA10 and KA13. The case where the ball is controlled to the second state may be, for example, when the jackpot game state corresponding to any of the jackpot types NA09 to NA11 ends. The case where the ball can be controlled to the second state at a high rate may be, for example, when the jackpot control example AKC12 is used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage when the third advantageous state occurs in which the number of unit plays is small, and to increase the player's interest in the variable display.

[4] The variable display pattern determination means may determine a variable display pattern using common first data in a case where the variable display is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state and a case where the variable display is controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the second advantageous state, and may determine a variable display pattern using common second data in a case where the variable display is controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and a case where the variable display is controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state, corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the third advantageous state. Here, the common first data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table specified when the variable pattern type CB3-4 is selected. The common second data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table specified when the variable pattern type CB3-3 is selected.
In such a configuration, the commonality of the variable display is increased, making it difficult to recognize whether the state is the first state or the second state, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[5] The variable display pattern that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to the second advantageous state includes a first specific pattern in the case where the display is controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and the variable display pattern that can be determined in response to the variable display that is a trigger for controlling to the third advantageous state includes a second specific pattern in the case where the display is controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state, and the first specific pattern may have a longer variable display period than the second specific pattern. Here, the first specific pattern may be, for example, any of the variable patterns PB3-3 to PB3-8. The second specific pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB3-1. The longer variable display period may be, for example, in the case of the variable display control example AKC21.
In such a configuration, when the variable display period is long, the expectation that the number of unit games will be controlled to the second advantageous state in which the number of unit games is greater than the third advantageous state is increased, thereby improving the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[6] The variable display pattern determination means may determine a common variable display pattern for a case in which the value notification can be executed in response to the execution number of the variable display being the first number of times during the special state, between a case in which the control is made to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state and a case in which the control is made to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state. Here, the common variable display pattern may be, for example, the fluctuation pattern PB3-2.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the second advantageous state or the third advantageous state will result when the first number of variable displays are executed, it is possible to increase interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[7] A start-time performance execution means capable of executing a start-time performance corresponding to the start of an advantageous state is provided, and the start-time performance execution means may execute a common start-time performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state, and may execute a common start-time performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state. For example, it may be the case that the jackpot start performance pattern in the jackpot performance control example AKC13 is common in response to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening port is opened.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the first state or the second state will occur when the start-up performance is executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[8] A predetermined performance execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined performance corresponding to a unit game that can be executed a predetermined number of times in an advantageous state, and the predetermined performance execution means can execute a common predetermined performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the second advantageous state, and can execute a common predetermined performance when the first state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state and when the second state is controlled after the end of the third advantageous state. For example, it may be the case that the performance pattern during a jackpot in the performance control example AKC13 becomes common corresponding to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is performed.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the first state or the second state will occur when a predetermined presentation is executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[9] The game machine may be provided with an end-time performance execution means capable of executing an end-time performance in response to the end of an advantageous state, and the end-time performance execution means may execute a common end-time performance in the case where the game machine is controlled to the first state after the end of the second advantageous state and in the case where the game machine is controlled to the second state after the end of the second advantageous state, and may execute a common end-time performance in the case where the game machine is controlled to the first state after the end of the third advantageous state and in the case where the game machine is controlled to the second state after the end of the third advantageous state. For example, the jackpot end performance pattern in the jackpot performance control example AKC13 may be common in response to the maximum number of times the jackpot opening port is opened.
In such a configuration, by making it difficult to recognize whether the first state or the second state will occur when the end-of-game performance is executed, it is possible to increase the interest in the variable display.

[10] A counting means capable of setting counting information in response to the end of an advantageous state is provided, and the counting means sets counting information indicating a first designated value when controlled to a first state, and sets counting information indicating a second designated value when controlled to a second state, and may be capable of displaying a common background image during the first state and the second state. Here, the counting means may be, for example, a special period performance designated value buffer. The first designated value may be, for example, 07 [H]. The second designated value may be, for example, 0E [H]. The common background image may be, for example, a performance image of a high base medium background in the performance execution example AK101.
In such a configuration, it is difficult to tell whether the player is in the first state or the second state based on the display of the background image, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the variable display.

[11] The variable display pattern determination means may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using common determination data when the number of times the variable display is executed in the first state is less than the first number of times and when the number of times the variable display is executed in the second state is less than the first number of times. For example, the common determination data may be table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variable pattern type CB2-1 is selected.
In such a configuration, the commonality of the variable display is increased, making it difficult to recognize whether the player is in the first state or the second state, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[12] The variable display pattern determination means may be capable of determining the variable display pattern using different determination data when the variable display is executed a first number of times in the first state and when the variable display is executed a first number of times in the second state. For example, the variable display pattern determination table may be data specified when the variable pattern type CB1-8 is selected and when the variable pattern type CB1-9 is selected.
In such a configuration, the first number of variable displays can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[13] The variable display pattern determination means can determine a first non-specific pattern for executing a variable display for a first variable display period when the display result of the variable display in which the execution count is a first number of times in the first state is not a specific result, and can determine a second non-specific pattern for executing a variable display for a second variable display period that is a period that is more than twice the first variable display period when the display result of the variable display in which the execution count is a first number of times in the second state is not a specific result, and the notification means can execute a value notification during the variable display by the first non-specific pattern, and execute a value notification and a notification that the second state is in the variable display by the second non-specific pattern. Here, the first variable display period may be, for example, a case where the special chart fluctuation time is 12500 milliseconds. The first non-specific pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB1-8. The second variable display period may be, for example, a case where the special chart fluctuation time is 29900 milliseconds. The second non-specific pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB1-9. The notification that the second state is reached may be, for example, performance execution example AK105.
In such a configuration, the first number of variable displays can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[14] A specific display means capable of displaying a specific image may be provided, and the specific display means may not display the specific image while a value notification is executed during a variable display in which the number of executions in the first state is a first number, and may display the specific image in association with the execution of a value notification during a variable display in which the number of executions in the second state is a first number. Here, the specific image may be, for example, a performance image of the button display AKE01. The specific display means may be, for example, an image display device 5. Not displaying the specific image may be, for example, a performance execution example AK103. Displaying the specific image may be, for example, a performance execution example AK104.
In such a configuration, by executing appropriate notification, it is possible to increase interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[15] The notification means executes a value notification during a variable display in which the number of executions during a special state is a first number, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first special pattern capable of executing a first variable display performance in which the proportion of control to an advantageous state is high when the number of executions of the variable display during a special state is less than the first number, and a second special pattern capable of executing a second variable display performance in which the proportion of control to an advantageous state is lower than the first variable display performance, and the second special pattern has a shorter variable display period than the first special pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the second special pattern when the number of executions of the variable display during a special state is a first number. Here, the first variable display performance may be, for example, a reach performance of a super reach SPF. The first special pattern may be, for example, a variable pattern PB2-3. The second variable display performance may be, for example, a reach performance of a super reach SPE. The second special pattern may be, for example, a variable pattern PB2-2. The variable display period of the first special pattern may be, for example, a special chart fluctuation time of 35500 milliseconds. The variable display period of the second special pattern may be, for example, a special chart fluctuation time of 16500 milliseconds. Variable display patterns having a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB1-8 having a special chart fluctuation time of 12500 milliseconds, a fluctuation pattern PB3-2 having a special chart fluctuation time of 4500 milliseconds, a fluctuation pattern PB3-9 having a special chart fluctuation time of 11500 milliseconds, etc.
In such a configuration, the variable display in which the value is notified can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[16] The variable display pattern determination means can determine any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first special pattern capable of executing a first variable display performance in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high when the number of times the variable display is executed during a special state is less than the first number, and a second special pattern capable of executing a second variable display performance in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is lower than the first variable display performance, and can determine any one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first pattern corresponding to a case in which the display result of the variable display executed the first number of times during a special state is a specific result, and a second pattern corresponding to a case in which the display result of the variable display executed the first number of times during a special state is not a specific result, and the first pattern and the second pattern may have a shorter variable display period than the second special pattern. Here, the first variable display performance may be, for example, a reach performance of a super reach SPF. The first special pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB2-3. The second special pattern may be, for example, a fluctuation pattern PB2-2. The first pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB3-2, PB3-9, etc. The second pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB1-8, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of the variable display control example AKC31.
In such a configuration, the variable display in which the value is notified can be appropriately executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[17] The advantageous state includes a first value advantageous state and a second value advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first value advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine one of a plurality of variable display patterns including a first pattern corresponding to a case where the display result of the variable display that is executed a first number of times during the special state is a specific result, and a second pattern corresponding to a case where the display result of the variable display that is executed a first number of times during the special state is not a specific result, and the first pattern includes a third pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the first value advantageous state, and a fourth pattern that can be determined corresponding to the variable display that is a trigger for control to the second value advantageous state, and the third and fourth patterns may have a shorter variable display period than the second pattern. Here, the first value advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the jackpot opening is any one of "02", "04", and "07". The second value advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening port is opened is "10". The first pattern may be, for example, fluctuation patterns PB3-2, PB3-9, etc. The second pattern may be, for example, fluctuation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, etc. The third pattern may be, for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-2, etc. The fourth pattern may be, for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, when the presentation state selection designated value is 0C[H], 0D[H] in the variable display control example AKC31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of surprise when the first number of variable displays results in a specific result, thereby enhancing interest in the game related to the variable displays.

[18] The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having a smaller number of unit games than the first advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine one of a plurality of specific variable display patterns in response to a variable display that triggers control to the first advantageous state when the number of executions of the variable display in the special state is less than the first number, and can determine a special variable display pattern in response to the number of executions of the variable display in the special state being the first number, and the special variable display pattern may have a shorter variable display period than the average variable display period in the plurality of specific variable display patterns. Here, the first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is "10". The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is "02", "04", or "07". The specific variable display pattern may be, for example, the variation patterns PB3-9 to PB3-11. The special variable display pattern may be, for example, the variable pattern PB3-2, PB3-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of the big win type KA15 in the variable display control example AKC21, or in the case of the variable display result being "big win" with the presentation state selection designated value 0C [H], 0D [H] in the variable display control example AKC31.
In such a configuration, the first number of variable displays can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game related to the variable display.

[19] The advantageous state includes a first type advantageous state and a second type advantageous state, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern capable of executing a notification by the notification means in response to the variable display being executed a first number of times in the special state, using the specific determination data, and is capable of determining a variable display pattern using normal determination data when the variable display is executed a first number of times in the special state, and the normal determination data is capable of determining the first type variable display pattern in response to the variable display that triggers control to the first type advantageous state, and controls to the second type advantageous state. A second type variable display pattern can be determined in response to a variable display that triggers control to a first type advantageous state, and a common type common variable display pattern can be determined for the specific determination data in the case of a variable display that triggers control to a second type advantageous state, and a notification variable display pattern that can execute notification by a notification means can be determined in response to a variable display that does not trigger control to an advantageous state, and the type common variable display pattern is included in the first type variable display pattern and the second type variable display pattern, and may have a shorter variable display period than the notification variable display pattern. Here, the first type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "02". The second type advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened is "04". The specific determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variable pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be, for example, table data of a variation pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. The first type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-1, PB3-2, etc. The second type variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB3-2 to PB3-8, etc. The type-common variable display pattern may be, for example, variation pattern PB3-2, etc. The notification variable display pattern may be, for example, variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, etc. The variable display period may be short, for example, in the case of variation pattern PB3-2 compared to variation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9 in the variable display control example AKC32.
In such a configuration, an increase in data volume can be prevented, and the sense of surprise when the variable display results in a specific result can be increased, thereby improving interest in the game related to the variable display.

[20] The variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern that can be notified by the notification means in response to the execution number of the variable display during the special state being a first number of times, using the specific determination data, and can determine a variable display pattern using the normal determination data when the execution number of the variable display during the special state is less than the first number of times, and the total number of variable display patterns that can be determined using the specific determination data may be less than the total number of variable display patterns that can be determined using the normal determination data. Here, the specific determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB1-8, CB1-9, CB4-1, and CB4-2 are selected. The normal determination data may be, for example, table data of a variable pattern determination table that is specified when the variation pattern types CB2-1, CB3-2 to CB3-5 are selected. A small total number may be, for example, when the total number of fluctuation patterns PB1-8, PB1-9, PB3-2, and PB3-9 is "4" compared to the total number of fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-11 in variable display control example AKC21 and fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 in variable display control example AKC31, which is "13."
In such a configuration, an increase in data volume can be prevented, and interest in the game relating to the variable display can be increased.

[21] The first state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state, and the control for making the variable display easier to execute than that of the normal state can be executed until the first number of variable displays are executed, and the second state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is the same as that of the normal state, and the control for making the variable display easier to execute than that of the normal state can be executed until the second number of variable displays are executed, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the variable display pattern using the first determination data until the number of executions of the variable display in the second state becomes the first number, and can determine the variable display pattern using the second determination data after the number of executions of the variable display in the second state exceeds the first number, and the variable display pattern that can be determined using the second determination data may have a shorter average variable display period than the variable display pattern that can be determined using the first determination data. Here, the first determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04, and the second determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS02. The average variable display period may be short, for example, when the fluctuation pattern type CB2-1 includes fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3, whereas the fluctuation pattern types CB1-2 and CB1-3 do not include fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3.
In such a configuration, the variable display during the second state can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[22] The variable display pattern that can be determined using the first determination data includes a performance variable display pattern that can notify whether or not to execute a specific performance to control to an advantageous state after a reach state is established in the variable display, and the variable display pattern that can be determined using the second determination data does not need to include a performance variable display pattern. Here, the specific performance may be, for example, a super reach SPE, a reach performance of an SPF, etc. The performance variable display pattern may be, for example, a variation pattern PB2-2, PB2-3, etc.
In such a configuration, the variable display during the second state can be appropriately executed, thereby enhancing the interest in the game regarding the variable display.

[23] The advantageous state includes a specific advantageous state in which a specific condition can be satisfied, the special state control means may be capable of controlling to a first special state after termination of the specific advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the specific advantageous state, and may be capable of controlling to a second special state after termination of the specific advantageous state based on the non-satisfaction of the specific condition during the specific advantageous state, the first special state and the second special state being states in which the variable display is likely to be executed until a first number of variable displays are executed, the variable display pattern determination means may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using first special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed in the first special state being less than the first number, may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using second special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed in the second special state being less than the first number, and may be capable of determining a variable display pattern using third special determination data in response to the first number of times the variable display is executed in the first special state and the first number of times the variable display is executed in the second special state. Here, the specific condition may be, for example, a specific area passing flag being on. The specific advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types KA12 to KA15. The first special state may be, for example, a high probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to a V win is "70". The second special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to no V win is "70". The first special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS03. The second special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS04. The third special determination data may be, for example, table data corresponding to the reference table TS08.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume while appropriately executing the variable display up to the first number of times, thereby enhancing the interest in the game relating to the variable display.

[24] The game machine has a specific area and is provided with a variable winning means that can be changed to a first change state where the game medium can enter and a second change state where the game medium cannot easily enter, and a specific condition is established when the game medium passes through the specific area during a specific advantageous state, and the first state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state and variable display is more likely to be executed than that of the normal state, and the second state is a state in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is the same as that of the normal state and variable display is more likely to be executed than that of the normal state. Here, the specific area may be, for example, a V winning area 51. The first change state may be, for example, an open state. The second change state may be, for example, a closed state. The variable winning means may be, for example, a special variable winning ball device 50.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume while appropriately executing the variable display up to the first number of times, thereby enhancing interest in the game relating to the variable display.

[25] The advantageous state includes a special advantageous state in which a specific condition is difficult to satisfy, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a third special state after the special advantageous state ends based on the satisfaction of the specific condition during the special advantageous state, and is capable of controlling to a fourth special state after the special advantageous state ends based on the non-satisfaction of the specific condition during the special advantageous state, the third special state and the fourth special state are states in which the variable display is likely to be executed until a second number of variable displays are executed, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern using the first special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed in the third special state being less than the first number. In the fourth special state, the variable display pattern can be determined using the second special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being less than the first number, and in the third special state, the variable display pattern can be determined using the fourth special determination data in response to the number of times the variable display is executed being the first number and the number of times the variable display is executed being the first number, and in the third special state, the variable display pattern can be determined using the common determination data in the case where the number of times the variable display is executed being exceeded the first number and the case where the number of times the variable display is executed being exceeded the first number. Here, the special advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot types NA09 to NA11. The third special state may be, for example, a high probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to the presence of a V prize is "10000". The fourth special state may be, for example, a low probability high base state in which the time-saving counter initial value corresponding to no V prize is "10000". The first special decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS03. The second special decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS04. The fourth special decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS09. The common decision data may be, for example, table data corresponding to reference table TS02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data volume while appropriately executing the variable display more than the first number of times, thereby enhancing the interest in the game relating to the variable display.

Figure 10 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched from a specified ball launching device and hit into this gaming area.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 12). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 10, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 12), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 10). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 10). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 12).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 12).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 11 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 turning on and off, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S903, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S904 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball striking handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Fig. 14. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Fig. 14 starts, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S9021). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, the pachinko game machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormalities, and a warning can be issued if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S9022). After this, a predetermined information output process is executed to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has been reached) that is supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S9024). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S9026). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S9027). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S9027, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S9025 shown in Figure 14. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set for transmission in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In addition, the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 16 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 16 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 16 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 16(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 16(A).

As shown in FIG. 16(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 16(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 17, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 18 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 19 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 18 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 19, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 193SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 193SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic feature 193SG) will be described.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 20-33 and 20-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 20-34 and 20-35, a part in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) that temporarily stops special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then resumes the variable display is a specific effect (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 19 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which, as the suggestive performance, the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figs. 20-33 and 20-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 20-34 and 20-35, a part in which the left and right decorative patterns are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the concentrated lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggested performance execution means moves the effect display toward a predetermined position where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) will temporarily stop if it does (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-48 as modified example 193SG-1, a portion where a converging line is moved toward the center of the image display device 5).
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
The effect display has a higher transparency after the specified timing than before the specified timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-33, in the case where the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines are displayed with a density of D2 before the timing of switching the display image data, and the convergence lines are displayed with a density of D1 after the timing of switching the display image data, so that the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher after the timing of switching the display image data than before the timing of switching the display image data).
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, the transparency of the effect display increases after the specified timing when the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops, thereby making the player aware that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) will not temporarily stop, and by drawing attention to the background image which is easily visible through the effect display, the player's disappointment that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
The suggestive effect execution means erases the effect display when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped, before any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the portion where the converging lines are hidden before the decorative pattern of "1", which is a winning combination, or a number other than "1", which is a losing combination, stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C).
5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for a temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
When the notification performance is executed, the temporarily stopped specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in Figs. 20-35(G) to 20-35(H), a portion where a crack appears in the pseudo consecutive pattern and explodes),
A movable body (e.g., a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to a performance position (e.g., a first performance position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) when the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped.
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body and the transformation of the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) can give an even stronger impression to the player that the ball has been temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
The movable body is
It is possible to perform a first action (e.g., movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 20-2 to the first performance position) and a second action (e.g., movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 20-2 to the second performance position) that has a smaller area of overlap with the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) than the first action,
In the notification performance, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35(F), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance).
7. The gaming machine according to claim 6,
According to this feature, it is possible to impress upon the player that the reel has been temporarily stopped, while preventing the movable object from making it difficult to see the specific performance identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of form 8 is
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a second movable body LED 193SG034) capable of emitting light,
In the first operation, the light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-2, during the temporary stop notification performance, the second movable body LED 193SG034 emits light in the color of the concentrated line displayed in the temporary stop suggestion performance).
8. The gaming machine according to claim 7,
According to this feature, the light-emitting portion emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-35(F) and FIG. 20-35(G), the part where the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first performance position to the retreat position before the pseudo consecutive pattern is not displayed on the image display device 5).
9. The gaming machine according to claim 7 or 8,
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is being erased.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
When the notification performance is executed, the temporarily stopped specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in Figs. 20-35(G) to 20-35(H), a portion where a crack appears in the pseudo consecutive pattern and explodes),
A specific performance corresponding display means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of displaying a specific performance corresponding display (for example, a display of “×2”, “×3”, “×4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed after the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A movable body (e.g., a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to a performance position (e.g., a first performance position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific performance corresponding display displayed by the specific performance corresponding display means;
Equipped with
10. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 9,
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase attention to the specific performance-related display, thereby improving the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a second movable body LED 193SG034) capable of emitting light,
The light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect-corresponding display (for example, a part that causes the second movable body LED193SG034 to emit light in blue when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start count notification effect, in green when displaying "x3", and in red when displaying "x4").
11. The gaming machine according to claim 10,
According to this feature, since the light-emitting portion emits light in a manner corresponding to the separately variable display-compatible display, it is possible to draw attention to the specific performance-compatible display, thereby improving the performance effect.

A gaming machine of form 12 is
a special effect execution means (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a special effect (e.g., a portion in which a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5) in the case where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestion effect is executed;
Equipped with
When the suggestive performance is executed, the performance display of the suggestive performance is displayed in priority to the variable display of the performance identification information during the suggestive performance (for example, a portion in which a pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 instead of a normal decorative pattern),
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect relating to a transition between a first effect period up to the predetermined timing when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves to a predetermined position and temporarily stops (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-33, a period before the timing of switching display image data in the temporary stop suggestion effect) and a second effect period when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing and moves to a position past the predetermined position (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-33, a period after the timing of switching display image data in the temporary stop suggestion effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-33, FIG. 20-35, FIG. 20-44, a portion in the center of the image display device 5 that displays a convergence line while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image),
12. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 11,
This feature makes it easier to control the display in suggestive performances, and prevents the transition to the second performance period from becoming unnatural when the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) does not temporarily stop due to the special performance.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position is superimposed with the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a semi-transparent state at a position different from the predetermined position and corresponding to the second effect period (for example, a portion in the center of the image display device 5 that displays a temporary stop suggestion image),
13. The gaming machine according to claim 12,
This feature makes the transition to the second performance period even more natural.

A gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means is capable of synthesizing and displaying images drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-3 and 20-4, a portion capable of synthesizing and displaying data drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 on the image display device 5);
The drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestive effect is drawn (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-3, a portion in which a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo consecutive pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a convergent line is drawn as image data 4).
14. The gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13,
According to this feature, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) and the performance display of the special performance can be drawn separately from the performance display of the suggested performance, thereby increasing the freedom of the suggested performance, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information), and the special performance.

A gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect in which the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed, then moved and erased (for example, as shown in Figs. 20-35(G) to 20-35(H), 20-36(I) and 20-36(J), a portion in which a pseudo consecutive pattern cracks and explodes, and then moves toward the player and is then hidden).
The display means further includes a specific effect display means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of displaying a specific effect display (e.g., a display of “×2”, “×3”, “×4”, etc.) that indicates that the N+1th variable display will be executed after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased,
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-37, a portion that moves and displays displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4" and the like toward the player and then makes them invisible);
The effect identification information in the N+1th variable display is visible during the period from when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased until when the specific effect corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-37(O) , when “x2”, “x3”, “x4”, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative patterns on the left and right are visible to the player).
15. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 14,
According to this feature, the presentation effect of the notification presentation and the specific presentation corresponding display can be enhanced, and since the presentation identification information can be seen before the specific presentation corresponding display is erased, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display will resume.

A gaming machine of form 16 is
A notice performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a notice performance that notifies the player of the high possibility of the advantageous state by using the performance identification information,
The advance notice performance execution means restricts the execution of the advance notice performance when the specific performance corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-3, in the case where the display of "x2", "x3", "x4" is moved (enlarged) toward the player as the first variable display start count notification performance, the portion restricting the advance notice performance execution).
16. The gaming machine according to claim 15,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution of the advance notice makes it difficult to recognize that the variable display will resume.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
The movement of both the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific effect corresponding display is toward the player who is playing the game (for example, a portion where a pseudo consecutive pattern explodes and moves toward the player, and a portion where displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. move toward the player).
17. The gaming machine according to claim 15 or 16,
This feature can enhance the impression given to the player and improve the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
A special effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 ) is provided that can execute a special effect (for example, a portion that displays a visibility-impairing image such as an image of an explosion as shown in modified example 193SG-4) that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has been temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed,
The specific performance execution means makes it possible to view a display corresponding to the resumption of variable display after the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to view by the special performance (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-4, a part that executes variable display again after making the visibility-impairing image non-display),
18. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
According to this feature, before a display including performance identification information corresponding to the resumption of variable display is started, a special performance is executed in which the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is difficult to see, making it easy to understand that the variable display will be resumed.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
An image display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a variable display of the performance identification information and a performance display of each performance;
A light guide plate (e.g., the light guide plate shown in modified example 193SG-4) that is a transparent plate material that is provided on the player side of the image display means and allows the player to see the display of the image display means and that can display the special image by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface;
Equipped with
The special effect execution means makes the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means difficult to see by displaying the special image on the light guide plate during the special effect (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a visibility-impairing image is displayed on the light guide plate, making the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see for the player).
20. The gaming machine according to claim 18,
According to this feature, a special image is displayed on the light guide plate, which can enhance the impression on the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
In the case where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-33, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data is V1, but the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of switching the display image data is V3).
20. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 19,
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether it is before or after the specified timing at which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to the temporary stop predetermined position before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position after the predetermined timing when it returns to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo-consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo-consecutive pattern may temporarily stop after starting to move downward on the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive pattern before the display image data switching timing is different from the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive pattern when it returns to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5).
21. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
This feature makes it easier for the player to understand whether the movement is before passing a predetermined position, or a return movement after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
The suggestion effect execution means, when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, restricts the display of the effect display (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-5, when the pseudo consecutive pattern returns to the center of the image display device 5 after once passing through the center of the image display device 5, does not display the convergence lines again).
22. The gaming machine according to claim 21 .
This feature makes it even easier to understand that the movement is a return movement after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-34, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is V1, but the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is V2).
20. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 19,
This feature makes it easier for the player to understand whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The direction of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the direction of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, as shown in Figures 20-34 and 20-35, the pseudo consecutive patterns before the temporary stop move from above to below, but the pseudo consecutive patterns after the temporary stop move toward the player (nearby side)).
24. The gaming machine according to claim 23,
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement has occurred after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent the misconception of movement.

Figure 20-1 is a configuration diagram showing the control board etc. in this characteristic part 193SG. As shown in Figure 20-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is equipped with a drive motor (not shown), and is operable by the performance control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. In addition, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for illuminating the second movable body 193SG033 is built into the second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), when not in operation, the second movable body 193SG033 is located between the image display device 5 and the game board 2, in a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position). Note that in the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, making it difficult for the player to see.

The second movable body 193SG033 in this characteristic part 193SG moves upward from the retreat position shown in FIG. 20-2(A) during the variable display to notify of a temporary stop during the variable display and the first variable display start count notification during the variable display, as described below, and as a jackpot notification during the reach effect of the super reach.

When the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves (operates) from the retracted position to the first performance position which is in front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 20-2 (B), whereas when the jackpot notification is executed in the reach effect of the super reach, the second movable body 193SG003 moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second performance position which is in front of the image display device 5 and is higher than the first performance position, as shown in FIG. 20-2 (C).

Although not specifically shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has been moved to the first or second performance position is configured to return from the first or second performance position to the retreat position again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance, so that a portion of the second movable body 193SG overlaps with the pseudo consecutive symbols when viewed from the front (see FIG. 20-35 (F)). On the other hand, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second performance position only when a jackpot notification is executed during the super reach performance. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first performance position is an operation that overlaps with a larger area of the pseudo consecutive symbols than the movement from the retracted position to the second performance position.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 20-3(A) to 20-3(D) and Figs. 20-4(A) to 20-4(D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 20-3 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance (see Fig. 20-35) in this characteristic section 193SG, and Fig. 20-4 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display a temporary stop suggestion image that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern (the pattern displayed as "NEXT" in this feature section) will stop (temporarily stop) in the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being performed.

The pseudo consecutive symbols in this feature section 193SG are special symbols that are displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the decorative symbols only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect described below, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped to execute the re-variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo consecutive effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive symbols may be symbols that are different from the decorative symbols and that are displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect described below.

Furthermore, in this feature section 193SG, an example has been given of a form in which the pseudo consecutive pattern is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of a decorative pattern only during a temporary stop suggestion effect or a temporary stop notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern that is displayed as part of a variable display along with a normal decorative pattern even during a temporary stop suggestion effect or a temporary stop notification effect.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols are different from the decorative symbols, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by temporarily stopping the normal decorative symbols (the symbols of the numbers "1" to "9" in this feature section) in the center of the image display device 5, and then changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols into the pseudo consecutive symbols.

As shown in Figures 20-3 (B) and 20-4 (A), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display the aforementioned pseudo consecutive symbols moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being performed, and is also data that is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative symbols (symbols from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 193SG) moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo consecutive symbols immediately after the temporary stop suggestion performance ends without the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping.

The image data 2 also displays a swaying display of decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R when a temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, and also displays a variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when a temporary stop suggestion effect is not being performed.

As shown in FIG. 20-4(B), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figures 20-3 (C) and 20-4 (C), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C).

As shown in Fig. 20-3 and Fig. 20-4, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priority on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as the image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as the image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

Although not shown, the image data in this characteristic section 193SG includes image data 1 to image data 4 as well as image data 5 that is drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5. The display priority of this image data 5 is set lower than that of image data 4. In other words, in this characteristic section 193SG, of the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer of data.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, as shown in FIG. 20-3(D), the image based on image data 2 (a pseudo-repeated pattern moving from the top to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 4 (concentrated lines), and the image based on image data 1 (a temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 20-4(D), the image based on image data 3 (a pseudo-repeated pattern moving from the center to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 4 (concentrated lines), and the image based on image data 2 (a decorative pattern moving from the top to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 3 and the image based on image data 4.

The convergent lines in this feature section 193SG are set to a high transmittance (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in Figures 20-3(C) and 20-4(D), while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, the player can see the decorative patterns, pseudo consecutive patterns, and temporary stop suggestion images through the convergent lines.

In particular, in this characteristic section 193SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 20-3 on the image display device 5 to draw the player's attention to whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Also, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop regardless of whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 20-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from the image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop (FIG. 20-3) to the image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns will not temporarily stop (FIG. 20-4) shown in FIG. 20-4.

Figure 20-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 193SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 20-5(A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20-5(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability), and whether it will be a small win, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 20-5(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 20-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 20-6, in this feature section 193SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 20-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 193SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 193SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 193SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 193SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 193SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 20-7(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 193SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature section 193SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 20-8 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 193SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 193SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 20-8 (B). In this feature section 193SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game of "Probable jackpot C", a round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature section 193SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 20-9), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 193SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-8(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-8(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 20-9 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns for the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern for the normal reach fluctuation pattern, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and the super reach fluctuation pattern for the super reach fluctuation pattern. Note that, although this feature section 193SG has two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, or there may be only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern. Also, for the super reach fluctuation pattern, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature section 193SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 20-9, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature section 193SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing, and therefore in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, as described below, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 20-10 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-10, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpot), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win A or sure-win B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in Figure 20-10, the determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4 are different between jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot A or a sure-variable jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to be a Super Reach variable pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times that the pseudo consecutive performances are executed, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot A or a sure-variable jackpot B, more pseudo consecutive performances are likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. For this reason, this feature section 193SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the variable pattern in the variable display and the number of times that the pseudo consecutive performances are executed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, a special win variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win variation pattern) using the special win variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, so it is difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss) and PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 193SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 11 is provided with a performance control data holding area 193SG190 as shown in FIG. 20-11(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 20-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 193SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 193SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 193SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 193SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 193SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 20-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 193SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 193SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this characteristic part 193SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a display pending flag indicating whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Figure 16) is pending, in other words, indicating that the display pattern is pending because a start opening winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a pending memory count notification command have been newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start winning, and a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this feature unit 193SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a performance restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory. Note that the performance restriction flag is a flag that indicates that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading preview performance when a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port in the command analysis process (Figure 20-18) but the pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are not received within the first reserved memory number notification waiting time or the second reserved memory number notification waiting time described below.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)), and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 193SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 193SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 20-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 20-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 14 will be described based on FIG. 20-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the on state (step 193SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 193SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 193SGS104; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 193SGS103 or step 193SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (step 193SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 193SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 13.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 193SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 193SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the processing proceeds to step 193SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the start winning processing is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 20-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 193SGS112 in Figure 20-13 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 193SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S110 in Figure 14, Figure 20-14) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" game state. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S111 in Figure 14, Figure 20-15) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 193SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 20-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 20-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 20-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 193SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 20-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 in FIG. 20-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 193SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 193SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 193SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 193SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 193SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 193SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. Of these, of miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, for example, 498 determination values from 0 to 497 (approximately 50%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 598 determination values from 0 to 597 (approximately 60%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values from 0 to 697 (approximately 70%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 determination values (approximately 10%) from 898 to 997 are assigned to the range of possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 193SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the non-reach and super reach determination will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 20-13 (A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

In addition, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is a sure jackpot A or a sure jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS136), and proceed to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; N), in other words, if the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot C, select and set the special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (step 193SGS137) and proceed to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern determination tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for variable pattern determination (step 193SGS138). In this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the determination made by the processing of step 193SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS132), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

Figure 20-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 15 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 20-14, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 193SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 193SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 193SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 193SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 193SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started to be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of step 193SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted up by one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 193SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 20-7 is selected and set as the table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 193SGS150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 193SGS150a, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting section (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-8 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 193SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that the result is not a "big win" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 20-7 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special chart display result of "small win" to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c). In step 193SGS150c, if the variable special chart is the first special chart, the determination value corresponding to the first special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win", and if the variable special chart is the second special chart, the determination value corresponding to the second special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win".

If it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section is set to the ON state (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; N), proceed to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, a fixed special symbol is set in response to the pre-determined result of whether to control to a big win game state (whether the big win flag is on or not), whether to control to a small win game state (whether the small win flag is on or not), and further, the determined result of the big win type in the case of a big win game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "big win" in step 193SGS150a, if the big win type in step 193SGS154 is "big win A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the big win type is "big win B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small jackpot", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small jackpot symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 193SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 20-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 15 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 20-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is identified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "Probable variable jackpot C", that is, if it is either "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", or "Non-probable variable jackpot" (step 193SGS163;N), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A or jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the identified jackpot type. Specifically, if the identified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot A" or "Probable variable jackpot B", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, if the identified jackpot type is a "C-type jackpot" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

If the determination in step 193SGS161 indicates that the big win flag is not ON (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small win flag is ON (step 193SGS166). If the small win flag is ON (step 193SGS166; Y), a special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game control flag setting unit determines whether the time-saving flag is on to determine whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 193SGS168). If the time-saving flag is on (step 193SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of multiple types of fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 193SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example, by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 193SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining the variable pattern as one of multiple types (step 193SGS174), and proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 193SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the process of step 193SGS175 determines the variation pattern, thereby determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, the process of step 193SGS170 includes a process for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 193SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 193SGS177). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variable start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 193SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 14 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 20-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 15 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 193SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and if the big win flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), it is further determined whether the small win flag is turned on (step 193SGS183).

If the small win flag is in the ON state, the performance control board 12 is set to send a win start 5 designation command corresponding to a small win (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small win display time is set in the small win display time timer (step 193SGS190b). Also, the large prize opening count counter is set to the number of times it has been opened (for example, 2 times) (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 193SGS190d), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 193SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or the time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 193SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 193SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving count counter value is "0". If the time-saving count counter value is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 193SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 193SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 193SGS195), and then proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 20-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 15 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 193SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is a special jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), the special jackpot flag is set to ON (step 193SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not a special jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is a special jackpot A or a special jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the special jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS208), the time-saving count counter is set to "0" (step 193SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), steps 193SGS211 and 193SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 193SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 193SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 20-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 15 as the command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 20-18, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted through the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it determines whether the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time set (set) in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 described later has elapsed (step 193SGS237), and if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, if the first or second pending memory number notification command has not been received before the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 193 SGS237; Y), the display pending flag of the entry for which the first or second pending memory number notification command has not yet been stored is turned on, and the performance restriction flag of the entry for which storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193 SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222). Then, if it is a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the processing of step 193SGS223, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the first pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the performance control timer setting unit 193SG192.

If the received command in step 193SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224). If it is a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), a second pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the processing of step 193SGS225, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 193SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command in step 193SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command in step 193SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, if it is a first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared (step 193SGS229), for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 193SGS228 is not the first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230). If the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231).

After executing either step 193SGS229 or step 193SGS231, the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and if there is an unreceived command, the performance restriction flag is set to ON (step 193SGS232).

If the received command in step 193SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), if the received command in step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or after executing any of the processes in steps 193SGS223, 193SGS225, and 193SGS232, the received command is stored at the top of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 193SG194A shown in Figure 20-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to step 193SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A.

If the received command in step 193SGS230 is not the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, if the first or second pending memory number notification command has not been received before the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 193SGS235; Y), the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and the performance restriction flag of the corresponding entry that has not yet been stored is set to ON (step 193SGS236), and processing returns to step 193SGS221.

Figure 20-19 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of a pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process, as well as the performance pattern of the pre-reading preview performance (display pattern of the pending memory display) (S161), and then executes a pending display update process to update the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS162).

Figure 20-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 14 as the advance preview setting process. In the advance preview setting process shown in Figure 20-20, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not variable display is being executed can be determined by whether or not the value of the performance control process flag is one of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241. If the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the process further judges whether or not the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed (step 193SGS240b). Note that the first variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has been started during one variable display after the re-variable display has been started as a pseudo consecutive effect, as shown in FIG. 20-29 (E), FIG. 20-30 (L), and FIG. 20-31 (S). Also, in step 193SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed can be judged by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the first variable display start count notification effect is not being executed (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241. If the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed (step 193SGS240b; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS250, where the pending display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, the pre-reading preview effect is not executed while the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed.

In step 193SGS241, the performance control CPU 120 checks the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. Then, it determines whether there is a new command stored at the start winning by checking whether there is an entry with the display pending flag in the on state (set to "1") (step 193SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display pending flag on (step 193SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry with the display pending flag on (step 193SGS242; Y), it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a sure-variable big win C or a small win (step 193SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a sure-variable big win C or a small win (step 193SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS250, where the reserved display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, the pre-reading notice performance is not executed for reserved memories that are sure-variable big win C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a sure jackpot C or a small jackpot, it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (sure jackpot A, sure jackpot B, or non-sure jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the type of jackpot is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 193SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the type of jackpot identified in step 193SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-21(A) is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-21(A), the determination ratio for whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type) is varied depending on the type of jackpot identified in the processing of step 193SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white rectangle (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than a sure-win jackpot C, the pre-reading preview performance will never be determined to be non-executed, and the pre-reading preview performance will always be determined to be executed, and either display pattern α or display pattern β will be determined as the display pattern (pre-notice type).

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-21(A), when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot A," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot B" or "Non-probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and display pattern β is executed as the display pattern (notice type), the probability that the jackpot type will be a special jackpot A is higher than when display pattern α is executed, and the player's anticipation of a special jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is always decided, and either display pattern α, which displays the reserved memory display in a white square (◇), or display pattern β, which displays the reserved memory display in a white star (☆) is executed; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, there may be a case where it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, just as when the variable display result is a "miss."

In addition, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of an entry whose display pending flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry whose display pending flag is on is identified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 193SGS247, a pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 20-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 193SGS247.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types): display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a specific form of a white square (◇), and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a specific form of a white star (☆). In addition, when the pre-reading notice performance is determined to be non-executed, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a normal form of a circle (○).

As shown in FIG. 20-21 (B), when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable category is "other", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable pattern category is "other", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach", and if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss," the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined not to be executed is set to the highest, regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach," "other," or "super reach," and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-21(A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading preview performance is not determined to be non-executed (no preview performance), and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern α or display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α or display pattern β is determined in any of the categories of variable patterns when the variable display result is a "miss".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss (non-reach)", "Miss (super reach)", or "Miss (other)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern α is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Big hit (probable hit A)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed); in particular, when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the probability that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "high probability jackpot A" increases, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

After executing step 193SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 193SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, i.e., whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 193SGS249).

After step 193SGS245 is executed or if it is decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern α showing the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern β showing the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

Also, in step 193SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 193SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white "circle" (step 193SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 changes the value of the display pending flag for the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Also, when the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U, which are located at the lower position of the image display device 5, is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A after the shift.

Specifically, if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of second special reserved memories is two, for example, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory, for example, the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays will be displayed, and each reserved memory display will be displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

And each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and the reserved memory display also shifts in a predetermined shift direction (towards the center of the screen in this feature part 193SG).

In other words, when the reserved memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described below, which is executed when the variable display starts, and the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed based on the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A after the shift, and if there is a new reserved memory due to the start winning, the display pattern of that reserved memory is determined and set in the reserved display flag, and it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag.

Note that, in this characteristic section 193SG, an example is shown in which the processing of step 193SGS252 is executed in the advance notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold display in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process different from the advance notice setting process (for example, a hold display update process).

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, a decision is made in step 193SGS242 as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory at the start winning, on the condition that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning. However, if a start winning in the first start winning port and a start winning in the second start winning port occur simultaneously, and it is determined in step 193SGS242 that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning in both the first special chart and the second special chart, in other words, if an entry with the display pending flag in the on state exists in both the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory, then both entries are subject to the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance. If the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special chart is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special chart is newly stored are both targets for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed simultaneously in both the pending display of the pending memory of the first special chart and the pending display of the second special chart.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute only one of the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart and the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

Figure 20-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 19. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 193SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stop patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stop patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the stop patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a reach miss combination (miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether or not the corresponding variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo consecutive performance during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the corresponding variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo consecutive performance during variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), a preview performance decision process for variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed) is executed to determine whether or not a preview performance is executed during variable display and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the change pattern is a super reach change pattern or not. If the change pattern is a super reach change pattern (193SGS279; Y), it decides whether to execute a special temporary stop notification performance instead of a temporary stop notification performance based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). The temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and the special temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and updating the background image displayed on image display device 5 to a background image according to the number of temporary stops (a first special background image if the temporary stop is the first time, a second special background image if the temporary stop is the second time, and a third special background image if the temporary stop is the third time).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281). If it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281; Y), it selects a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification performance and the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or if it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds based on the variable display result (step 193SGS283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

In addition, if the relevant variable pattern is one in which pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during variable display (step 193SGS277; N), a preview performance decision process for variable display that does not execute pseudo consecutive performance is executed to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute a preview performance and the preview performance to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variable pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in either 193SGS282, 193SGS284, or 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 193SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, it controls the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, it switches to the next process data, starts the next process timer anew, and controls the performance device according to the next process data, thereby executing the variable display of the decorative pattern. Note that if the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute a preview performance in the variable display start setting process, it is capable of executing a preview performance execution process to execute a preview performance within the variable display performance process.

Next, the flow of the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 20-23 (A), when the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive performance once during the variable display, a temporary stop suggestion performance is executed first, which suggests a temporary stop of the decorative symbols after the reach is reached. Note that the temporary stop suggestion performance in this characteristic part 193SG is a performance in which the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols are variably displayed at a slower speed than normal in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Note that the length of the temporary stop suggestion performance period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification performance period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

If the temporary stop notification performance period is set to the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing A occurs, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop notification performance is performed for 2 seconds. Also, if the temporary stop notification performance period is set to the temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing B occurs, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop notification performance is performed for 1.5 seconds. Note that, as shown in FIG. 20-23(A), the temporary stop notification performance period A and the temporary stop notification performance period B are set to end at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification performance is set to end at a specific timing regardless of whether the performance period is set to 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect ends, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. The re-variable display notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a re-variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed by outputting a re-variable display notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, and displaying an image of a character according to the number of re-variable display times on the image display device 5 (an image of character A if the re-variable display time is the first time, an image of character B if the re-variable display time is the second time, and an image of character C if the re-variable display time is the third time).

The first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification performance. When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the first re-variable display start count notification performance is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification performance. The first re-variable display start count notification performance is a performance in which the image display device 5 displays the re-variable display count of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display count, and an effect image of a color according to the re-variable display count is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In other words, the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the first re-variable display is a performance in which "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a blue effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5, the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the second re-variable display is a performance in which "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a green effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5, and the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the third re-variable display is a performance in which "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a red effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5.

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start count notification effect. The second variable display start count notification effect is an effect in which the variable display count of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect.

After the second variable display start count notification effect ends, the game will enter a reach state again and a temporary stop suggestion effect will be executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols will not temporarily stop and a normal reach reach effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 20-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during a variable display, in the same way as when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 20-23(A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during a variable display, after a reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop and re-variable display of the first pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, a second variable display start count notification effect, and a first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed, and then a reach is reached again and a second temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, a reach is reached again and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the Super Reach reach effect is executed.

If the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), and if the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds).

As described above, in the second re-variable display notification performance, an image of a character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the second first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, unlike the first first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 (the second second variable display start count notification performance displays "x3" of a smaller size than that of the second first variable display start count notification performance).

As shown in FIG. 20-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the change pattern is a super reach change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times during the variable display, the same as when the change pattern shown in FIG. 20-23 (B) is a super reach change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed twice during the variable display, after the reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive symbols up to the second time, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, the reach is reached again, and the third temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and further a reach effect of the super reach is executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), and if the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds).

As described above, in the third re-variable display notification performance, an image of a character (character C) different from that in the first and second re-variable display performances is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the third first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, different from the second first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance (the third second variable display start count notification performance displays "x4" of a smaller size than that in the third first variable display start count notification performance).

As shown in FIG. 20-26, if it has been decided to execute a special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during the variable display, a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed first.

In addition, in this variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect ends, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. In other words, in a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification effect period are constant.

After the special temporary stop notification effect is finished, the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern is executed without executing the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. After a while, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed. In other words, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is not displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, and the image display device 5 does not display "x2" as the first variable display start count notification effect, but only the image display device 5 displays "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect as the second variable display start count notification effect.

Then, after the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and then the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

In addition, as the second second variable display start count notification effect, a "x3" smaller in size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5, as in FIG. 20-23 (B).

As shown in Figure 20-27, when it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the notification effect of the number of times the second variable display has started are executed as in Figure 20-26, and then the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols for the third time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the notification effect of the number of times the second variable display has started are executed, and then the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

In addition, for the third second variable display start count notification effect, a "x4" smaller in size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5, as in FIG. 20-23 (B).

As mentioned above in part, as shown in FIG. 20-28, the temporary stop notification effect in this feature section 193SG is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the moment the decorative symbol temporarily stops as a pseudo consecutive effect, and updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image according to the number of temporary stops (the first special background image if the temporary stop is the first, the second special background image if the second, and the third special background image if the third). Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or the variable display ends, while the output period of the temporary stop notification sound (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, the same as part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a re-variable display of a decorative pattern is being executed by outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and displaying an image of a character according to the number of times of re-variable display on the image display device 5 (an image of character A if the number of times of re-variable display is the first, an image of character B if the number of times of re-variable display is the second, and an image of character C if the number of times of re-variable display is the third). The performance period of the re-variable display notification effect (the display period of the image of the character on the image display device 5 and the output period of the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 seconds regardless of the number of times of execution of the re-variable display. As mentioned above, in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance, the higher the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is executed (the number of times the temporary stop and re-variable display are executed), the higher the expectation of a big win is set for the re-variable display notification effect, so that the expectation of a big win is set to be highest when the image of character C is finally displayed, and the lowest when the image of character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including the re-variable display has started during one variable display after the re-variable display has started as a pseudo consecutive effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has started on the image display device 5 (the first first variable display start count notification effect is "x2", the second first variable display start count notification effect is "x3", and the third first variable display start count notification effect is "x4"). The duration of these first variable display start count notification effects is 1 second regardless of the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including the re-variable display has started.

The second variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started during one variable display after the first variable display start count notification effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started on the image display device 5 ("x2" for the first first variable display start count notification effect, "x3" for the second first variable display start count notification effect, and "x4" for the third first variable display start count notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect. Note that the duration of these second variable display start count notification effects is 2 seconds regardless of the number of times the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started.

Figure 20-29 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 20-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-29 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, a decision is made to not execute the preview performance at a rate of 5%, to execute the cut-in preview performance at a rate of 20%, to execute the group preview performance at a rate of 45%, and to execute both the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance at a rate of 30%.

Note that a cut-in preview effect is an effect in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-29 (F), and a swarm preview effect is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed crossing the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-29 (G).

If the variable display result is a miss and a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach miss), the preview performance is not executed at a rate of 40%, the cut-in preview performance is executed at a rate of 30%, the group preview performance is executed at a rate of 25%, and the cut-in preview performance and group preview performance are executed at a rate of 5%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and a normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach miss), the preview performance is not executed at a rate of 90%, the cut-in preview performance is executed at a rate of 8%, the group preview performance is executed at a rate of 2%, and the cut-in preview performance and group preview performance are executed at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance in this characteristic part 193SG, the lowest jackpot expectation is set when neither the cut-in notice performance nor the group notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the cut-in notice performance is executed as the notice performance than when neither the cut-in notice performance nor the group notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the group notice performance is executed as the notice performance than when only the cut-in notice performance is executed, and the highest jackpot expectation is set when both the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance are executed as notice performances (jackpot expectation for notice performance in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance: cut-in notice performance + group notice performance > group notice performance > cut-in performance > not executed).

After executing step 193SGS302, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a preview performance (deciding to execute at least one of a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance) (step 193SGS303). If it has not decided to execute any preview performance (step 193SGS303; N), it ends the preview performance decision process (for executing pseudo consecutive performances), and if it has decided to execute any preview performance (step 193SGS303; Y), it stores the decided preview performance and sets a preview performance start waiting timer to end the preview performance decision process (for executing pseudo consecutive performances) (steps 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 20-32, the execution period of these preview effects overlaps with the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start count notification performance period. In particular, if it has been decided that both the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance will be executed as preview effects, the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance will be executed in an overlapping manner during the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start count notification performance period.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if it is decided in the preview performance decision process (for when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed) that any preview performance will be executed, the same preview performance will be executed during all re-variable display notification performance periods (see Figures 20-29 to 20-31).

Figure 20-30 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 20-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display where pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, a decision is made to not execute the preview effect 5% of the time, to execute the cut-in preview effect 30% of the time, and to execute the group preview effect 65% of the time.

If the variable display result is a miss and a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach miss), the preview performance is not executed with a probability of 40%, the cut-in preview performance is executed with a probability of 35%, and the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 25%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and a normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach miss), the preview performance is not executed with a probability of 90%, the cut-in preview performance is executed with a probability of 8%, and the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed in this characteristic part 193SG, the lowest jackpot expectation is set when neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the cut-in preview performance is executed as the preview performance than when neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the group preview performance is executed as the preview performance than when only the cut-in preview performance is executed (jackpot expectation for preview performance in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance: group preview performance > cut-in performance > not executed).

After executing step 193SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313). If it has not been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313; N), the preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not executed) is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313; Y), the decided preview performance is stored, a preview performance start waiting timer is set, and the preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not executed) is terminated (steps 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

When a preview performance is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, the preview performance may be executed at any time during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

Figure 20-31 (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio when the performance control CPU 120 decides whether or not to execute a special temporary stop notification effect in step 193SG280 in Figure 20-22. In step 193SG280 in Figure 20-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach jackpot), the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20% and decides to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (not to execute the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss (super reach miss), the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 80% and decides to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (not to execute the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20%.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when a special temporary stop notification effect is executed in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (when a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern and a special background image is displayed on image display device 5), the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when a special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; when a temporary stop notification effect is executed) (expectation of a jackpot in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance: execution of special temporary stop notification effect > non-execution of special temporary stop notification effect).

Also, as mentioned above, when focusing on the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, if the pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during the variable display, only the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but if the pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during the variable display, after the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the first special background image is updated to the second special background image), and the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the second special background image is updated to the third special background image).

In other words, for variable displays that perform pseudo consecutive performances, the more pseudo consecutive performances that are performed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a jackpot is set, so that the highest chance of a jackpot is set when the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the third special background image, and the lowest chance of a jackpot is set when the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image (jackpot chance for special background images that are finally displayed on the image display device 5 in variable displays that perform pseudo consecutive performances: third special background image > second special background image > first special background image).

Figure 20-31 (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification presentation period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in Figure 20-22. In step 193SG283 in Figure 20-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification presentation period to be temporary stop notification presentation period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and to be temporary stop notification presentation period B (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the performance control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification presentation period to be temporary stop notification presentation period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40% and to be temporary stop notification presentation period B (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 60%. In other words, when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, if the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1.5 seconds (expectation of a jackpot for the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance: temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) > temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given of a form in which the temporary stop notification display period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification display period may be uniquely determined to be one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

In addition, this feature section 193SG exemplifies a form in which a longer temporary stop notification display period has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a shorter temporary stop notification display period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a shorter temporary stop notification display period may have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a longer temporary stop notification display period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-32, first, the speakers 8L, 8R are capable of outputting background music (BGM) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except during the re-variable display notification performance period. In addition, the speakers 8L, 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start count notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion performance period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification performance period, the re-variable display notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period, and the first variable display start count notification sound is output only during the first variable display start count notification performance period.

Furthermore, speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in preview performance sound and a group preview performance sound. Of these, the cut-in preview performance sound is output only during the cut-in preview performance execution period when it has been decided that a cut-in preview performance will be executed, and the group preview performance sound is output only during the group preview performance execution period when it has been decided that a group preview performance will be executed.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R is restricted during the variable display notification performance period in which the variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, while the output of BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R is not restricted during the variable display except for the variable display notification performance period. Furthermore, during the tentative stop suggestion performance period, two types of sounds, BGM and the tentative stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, while during the first variable display start count notification performance period, up to four types of sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, including the first variable display start count notification sound as well as BGM, a cut-in advance performance sound, and a group advance performance sound.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the tentative stop suggestion performance period will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-33, during the tentative stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 displays the moving pseudo consecutive symbols from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing them with image data 2. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the tentative stop suggestion performance period to the display image data switching timing. Note that the pseudo consecutive symbols are not drawn as image data 2 from the display image data switching timing onwards; in other words, the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden as image data 2 from the display image data switching timing onwards.

In addition, halfway through the pseudo consecutive pattern moving at speed V1, a tentative stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with image data 1. The tentative stop suggestion image is displayed from halfway through the pseudo consecutive pattern moving at speed V1 until the display image data switching timing period, but is not displayed (hidden) during other periods.

In addition, immediately before the timing of switching the display image data, the pseudo consecutive patterns begin to be displayed in the center of the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3. The pseudo consecutive patterns drawn by the image data 3 do not move (speed 0) until the timing of switching the display image data, but from the timing of switching the display image data, they move downward from the center of the image display device 5 at a speed V3 that is faster than the aforementioned speed V1. The pseudo consecutive patterns drawn by the image data 3 move out of the display area of the image display device 5, making them invisible.

Furthermore, from the timing of switching the display image data, the decorative symbols are moved (variable display) from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is performed from the timing of switching the display image data at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) that is faster than speed V1 and slower than speed V3. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbols continues until the start of the reach performance.

Then, from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, the image display device 5 displays the converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The converging lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, and then at D2, which is denser than D1. In other words, the number of converging lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the display image data is switched, the converging lines are displayed again at a density of D1, and then are hidden.

Therefore, during the period of the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo consecutive patterns are not stopped, from the start of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the time when the display image data is switched, the converging lines are displayed at a density of D1, making the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) lower than the state before the temporary stop suggestion performance was performed (visibility: high) (visibility: medium). Furthermore, the density of the converging lines changes from D1 to D2, making the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) even lower (visibility: low).

In addition, from the time when the display image data is switched to the time when the display of the converging lines ends, the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is higher (visibility: medium) than when the converging lines are displayed at density D2 because the converging lines are displayed at density D1. Then, after the time when the display of the converging lines ends, the display of the converging lines ends (they are not displayed), so the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is the highest (visibility: high).

As shown in FIG. 20-34, during the tentative stop indication period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 executes the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the tentative stop indication period to the end timing of the tentative stop indication period (the tentative stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the tentative stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols is the same as the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 20-33. Furthermore, after the tentative stop indication is executed, the tentative stop notification is executed, but during the tentative stop notification execution period, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped (at a speed V0) in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C and then hidden.

In addition, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The density (display density) of the converging lines is displayed in D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns), but is hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, the image display device 5 displays the converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The converging lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, and then are displayed at D2, which is denser than D1. In other words, the number of converging lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. The converging lines are then hidden from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped.

Therefore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive patterns are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the timing of the display image data change, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower (visibility: medium) than the state before the temporary stop suggestion performance was executed (visibility: high) because the concentration lines are displayed at density D1. Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is further lower (visibility: low) because the density of the concentration lines changes from D1 to D2. Also, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns, the display of the concentration lines ends (is not displayed), so the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIG. 20-34, after the end of the temporary stop suggestion display, that is, during the temporary stop notification display period, the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbols is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols by drawing image data 1. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbols is then switched to being displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 20-35). The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 193SG is an image whose transparency is set to 0%.

In other words, during the temporary stop notification performance period, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion performance execution period (visibility: medium) because the convergence lines are temporarily hidden, but the left and right decorative patterns become invisible due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the display of the provisionally stopped pseudo consecutive symbols in the image data 2 ends, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed moving toward the player (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) at a speed V2 by drawing the image data 2. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed moving (enlarged) over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so the pseudo consecutive symbols on the left and right are again invisible.

In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the moving display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 (variable display) are not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 193SG will be explained based on Figures 20-35 to 20-47.

First, if it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 20-35(A) to 20-35(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from the top to the bottom at a speed of V1 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a convergence line from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). The convergence line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of the display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time has passed.

If the variable display is a variable display according to the normal reach miss variable pattern PA2-1 that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward on the image display device at a speed V2 without temporarily stopping and become invisible, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (D). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4, PB1-2 to PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (E). In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-35 (F) and 20-35 (G), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 20-35(G) and Fig. 20-35(H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image is displayed of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding, and as shown in Fig. 20-36(I) and Fig. 20-36(J), an image is displayed of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT", which indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving towards the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-37 (K) to 20-37 (P), the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, an image of character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start count notification performance, and blue effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits blue light.

The "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, then displayed in a larger size and then hidden (see Figures 20-37 (O) and 20-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting blue light and moves from the first performance position to the retreat position. In addition, as the first second variable display start count notification performance, an image of "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5.

A short time after the first second variable display start count notification effect ends, as shown in Figures 20-38 (R) to 20-38 (T), the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, resulting in a reach, and then, as a second provisional stop suggestion effect, pseudo consecutive symbols move from above to below in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed of V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Note that the converging line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time has passed.

If the variable display is a normal reach miss variation pattern PA2-2 that executes the pseudo consecutive performance only once or a normal reach big win variation pattern PB1-2, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (U). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance two or more times (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern, as shown in FIG. 20-38 (V). In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-38 (W) and 20-38 (X), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the green light emitted by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 20-38(X) and Fig. 20-38(Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image is displayed of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding, and as shown in Fig. 20-39(Z) and Fig. 20-39(a), an image is displayed of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT", which indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving towards the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-40(b) to 20-40(h), the second re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, an image of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification performance, and green effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits green light.

The "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, then displayed in a larger size and then hidden (see Figures 20-40(f) and 20-40(g)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, a "x3" image smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 as the second second variable display start count notification performance.

A little while after the second second variable display start count notification effect ends, as shown in Figures 20-41 (e) to 20-41 (g), the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, resulting in a reach, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols move from above to below in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed of V1 as the third provisional stop suggestion effect. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a convergence line from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Note that the convergence line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 over a certain period of time.

And, when the variable display is a variation pattern PA2-3 of a super reach miss in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed only twice or a variation pattern PB1-3 of a super reach big win, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (h). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, or PB1-4) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed two or more times, as shown in FIG. 20-41 (i), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. Also, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-41(j) and 20-41(k), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the red light emitted by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 20-41(k) and Fig. 20-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 20-42(m) and Fig. 20-42(n), an image of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving toward the player is displayed.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-43(o) to 20-43(u), the third re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, an image of character C is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification performance, and red effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits red light.

The "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size (see Figures 20-43(s) and 20-43(t)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, a "x4" image smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 as the third second variable display start count notification effect.

Now, we will explain the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. As shown in Figures 20-44(A) and 20-44(B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-repeated pattern moves from top to bottom at speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above, and the converging lines are displayed at density D2. As the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses and the pseudo-repeated pattern approaches the temporary stop position, a pseudo-repeated pattern (a pseudo-repeated pattern drawn with image data 3) different from the pseudo-repeated pattern (a pseudo-repeated pattern drawn with image data 2) moving from top to bottom at speed V1 is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 (the temporary stop position of the decorative pattern), suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-repeated pattern.

If the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 20-44(C), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, causing an effect image for notifying a temporary stop to be displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern, and the second movable body 193SG033, which has moved from the retreat position to the first effect position, emits light in a color according to the number of temporary stops (number of pseudo consecutive stops) (blue for the first temporary stop, green for the second temporary stop, and red for the third temporary stop). Also, the converging lines displayed on the image display device 5 at this time are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, as shown in Figures 20-44 (D) and 20-44 (E), the pseudo consecutive pattern (the pseudo consecutive pattern drawn in image data 3) in the center of the image display device 5 becomes hidden, and the pseudo consecutive pattern (the pseudo consecutive pattern drawn in image data 2) that had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1 passes the temporary stop position at speed V2 and moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and becomes hidden. At the same time, the normal moving display of the decorative pattern is executed from top to bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the convergent lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 (the number of convergent lines displayed decreases) from the timing when the pseudo-repeated pattern starts to move at speed V2. Then, the convergent lines whose density has changed to D1 are no longer displayed a certain period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 20-44(F) and Fig. 20-44(G), after the convergence lines are hidden, a variable display is performed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C with the decorative patterns other than the pseudo consecutive patterns for a while, then a reach effect is performed according to the variation pattern, and finally a decorative pattern indicating a big win or a miss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature part 193SG, a "1" which is a big win combination, or a decorative pattern with a number other than "1" which is a miss combination stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). In other words, if the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden from the image display device 5, but the convergence lines are hidden before the decorative patterns stop in a big win or miss combination (more precisely, before the reach effect starts).

As described above, with regard to the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 20-45, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are less visible than before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect during the temporary stop suggestion effect, as the converging lines are displayed at a density of D1 (visibility: low). In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are even less visible as the converging lines change to a density of D2 (visibility: medium).

In addition, the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification performance period are more visible during the period from the start of the temporary stop notification performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols) to when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols, than during the temporary stop suggestion performance period (visibility: medium).

In addition, once the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification performance period, it becomes invisible to the player for the remainder of the temporary stop notification performance period (moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns toward the player) and the re-variable display notification performance period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start count notification performance, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative symbols are partially overlapped with the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" displayed in the center of the image display device 5, so that the visibility (medium visibility) is the same as immediately after the start of the temporary stop notification performance.

Then, the decorative symbols on the left and right become invisible to the player as the "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are enlarged (moved towards the player), and these "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are switched to small displays in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, making them the most visible (high visibility).

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Figures 20-36 to 20-37, 20-39 to 20-40, and 20-42 to 20-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect are different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may overlap in part. For example, as shown in Figures 20-36 to 20-37, when a pseudo-sequence pattern explodes and moves forward as a temporary stop notification effect on the image display device 5, a part of the pseudo-sequence pattern (for example, the letter "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the display of a character image as a re-variable display notification effect is started on the back side of a part of the pseudo-sequence pattern. By doing this, the image of the character becomes gradually visible to the player as the pseudo consecutive patterns are erased, improving the presentation effect, and furthermore, it becomes possible to transition the image displayed on the image display device 5 without any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 20-35(H) and the like, an example is given of a form in which an image of a pseudo-repeated pattern with a crack is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, and the image itself explodes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with the crack and the image of the explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying an image of a pseudo-repeated pattern with a crack on the image display device 5, an image of smoke or light coming out of the cracks is displayed. Then, the pseudo-repeated pattern is made difficult to see by the player by the image of smoke or light, and an image of an explosion is displayed in place of the pseudo-repeated pattern. This also makes it possible to transition the images displayed on the image display device 5 without any sense of incongruity.

Next, if it is decided to execute a special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, a reach will occur a while after the variable display starts, as shown in Figures 20-46 (A) to 20-46 (C). Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, a moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols indicating the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect is executed at a slower speed (speed V1) than normal in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-effect period ends, the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in Figures 20-46 (D) to 20-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound ends, the display of the first special background image begins on the image display device 5, and the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern begins. At this time, if it has been decided at the start of the variable display that a cut-in preview performance or a group preview performance will be performed, overlapping with the re-variable display notification performance.

Then, when the cut-in effect or group preview effect ends, the first second variable display start count notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start count notification effect.

After that, as shown in Fig. 20-47 (I) to Fig. 20-47 (N), the second temporary stop of the decorative symbols causes the first special background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed on the second special background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner, with a cut-in preview effect, a group preview effect, and a second second variable display start count notification effect being executed, and the third temporary stop of the decorative symbols causes the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner, with a cut-in preview effect, a group preview effect, and a third second variable display start count notification effect being executed. Then, a reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Figs. 20-33 and 20-34, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is reduced by displaying convergent lines at density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying convergent lines at density D2, thereby increasing the player's anticipation that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop due to the temporary stop suggestion effect. And as a temporary stop notification effect, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative symbols invisible, thereby increasing the excitement of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-44, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns should have temporarily stopped, making it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop, and also easing the player's disappointment that the pseudo-consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-33, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are displayed at density D2 before the timing of switching the display image data, and the concentration lines are displayed at density D1 after the timing of switching the display image data, so the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is higher after the timing of switching the display image data than before the timing of switching the display image data. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the concentration lines after the timing of switching the display image data, the player is made aware that the pseudo consecutive patterns will not temporarily stop, and by drawing attention to the background image through the concentration lines, the player's disappointment that the pseudo consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the convergence lines will be hidden before the decorative symbols that form a combination that will result in a jackpot or a miss together with the decorative symbols on the left and right in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C stop, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the stopping of the decorative symbols after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop for a temporary stop.

Also, as shown in Figures 20-35(G) to 20-35(H), when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position, and an image of the pseudo consecutive symbols cracking and exploding (an image of the pseudo consecutive symbols moving towards the player) is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of the exploding pseudo consecutive symbols can give an even stronger impression to the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped.

In particular, with this feature 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position as a temporary stop notification performance, so that the pseudo consecutive symbols and a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlap when viewed from the front. This prevents the second movable body 193SG033 from making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols, while giving the player the impression that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example of the transformation of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is shown as an explosion of the pseudo-consecutive patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of the transformation of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may include the pseudo-consecutive patterns changing into a specific figure shape (e.g., a circle or a triangle) or the size of the pseudo-consecutive patterns changing from before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, in addition to or instead of the second movable body 193SG033, the movable body 32 may be moved to the first performance position or a position different from the first performance position, which overlaps with at least a part of the pseudo consecutive pattern when viewed from the front.

Also, as shown in Figures 20-35 (F) and 20-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification presentation, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first presentation position to the retreat position before the pseudo consecutive symbols are no longer displayed on the image display device 5, so the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols will no longer be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the variable display of the characteristic part 193SG can execute pseudo consecutive performances up to three times, and each time the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped and a re-variable display is executed as one of these pseudo consecutive performances, a display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. corresponding to the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification performance. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-37(O), when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and a part of the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. overlap when viewed from the front, so that the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. corresponding to the variable display count can be drawn to, improving the performance effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 20-37(O), 20-40(f), and 20-43(s), when displaying "x2" as a variable display start count notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated blue, when displaying "x3" the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated green, and when displaying "x4" the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated red, thereby making it possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the first variable display start count notification effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are partially overlapped when viewed from the front. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may be completely overlapped.

As shown in Figs. 20-33, 20-35, and 20-44, the temporary stop suggestion performance displays a converging line while displaying a pseudo consecutive pattern as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, which makes it easier for the performance control CPU 120 to control the display of the temporary stop suggestion performance, and prevents the switching of image data (switching from the image data shown in Fig. 20-3 to the image data shown in Fig. 20-4) from appearing unnatural at the timing of switching the display image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop. In particular, after the timing of switching the display image data, the pseudo consecutive patterns move downward from the center of the image display device 5, so by displaying the pseudo consecutive patterns in advance as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, the switching of image data at the timing of switching the display image data can be performed in a more natural way that gives an even more uncomfortable feeling to the player.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this characteristic section 193SG, the presentation control CPU 120 can display an image on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the data rendered as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in Figs. 20-3 and 20-4. In particular, the pseudo consecutive patterns as temporary stop images are rendered as image data 1, which has the highest display priority, the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns are rendered as image data 2, which has a lower display priority than image data 1, and the converging lines as temporary stop suggestion presentations are rendered as image data 4, which has the lowest display priority, so that the degree of freedom of the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns during moving display (variable display), the pseudo consecutive patterns as temporary stop suggestion images, and the converging lines as temporary stop suggestion presentations can be increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIG. 20-35(H), FIG. 20-36(I), and FIG. 20-36(J), when the pseudo consecutive pattern explodes and moves forward on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, the left and right decorative patterns are not visible to the player. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-37(O), when "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification effect, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. This enhances the presentation effect of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially the display of "x2" or the like), and since the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player during the first variable display start count notification effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a re-variable display is being executed.

In addition, the part where the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and move as shown in Figures 20-35(H), 20-36(I), 20-36(J), etc., and the part where the displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., as shown in Figures 20-37(O), 20-37(P), etc., are both moving displays (enlarged displays) facing the player, so that the effects of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect can be enhanced by these moving displays facing the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-33, in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data is V1, but the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of switching the display image data is V3, so the player can easily grasp whether it is before or after the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping (before or after the timing of switching the display image data) based on the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the timing of switching the display image data is slower than the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the timing of switching the display image data, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the timing of switching the display image data may be faster than the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the timing of switching the display image data.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-34, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping is V1, but the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping is V2, so the player can easily understand whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before or after the temporary stop based on the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in Figures 20-34 and 20-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the provisional stop move from top to bottom, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the provisional stop move toward the player (the player's side). This makes it easier for the player to tell whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are moving before or after the provisional stop based on the direction of movement, and prevents misinterpretation of the pseudo consecutive symbols' movement display.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given in which the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols is different before and after the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols may be the same before and after the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop. Furthermore, the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop does not have to be toward the player (the front side) as long as it is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is slower than the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the number of display frames for displaying the image of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the performance period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed) and the period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed after the display image data switching timing may be different. In other words, in the present invention, "the speed at which the specific performance identification information (the pseudo-consecutive patterns in this feature section 193SG) moves is different" includes the number of display frames required to display the pseudo-consecutive patterns being different, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed (the performance period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed).

The characteristic features 193SG of the present invention have been described above using drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a form was exemplified in which a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion performance to draw the player's attention to whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop in the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C), but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figs. 20-48(A) to 20-48(D) as a modified example 193SG-1, a concentration line may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the concentration line may be moved toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion performance (the pseudo consecutive patterns moving toward the center of the image display device 5). In this way, the player can identify that the pseudo consecutive patterns may stop in the center of the image display device 5, so that if the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the player can more easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 193SG, a form is exemplified in which a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion performance, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is illuminated in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-2, when a temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a color corresponding to the number of times the temporary stop suggestion performance is executed. For example, when the first temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in blue, when the second temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in green, and when the third temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in red. In this way, when the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated as a temporary stop notification performance, the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated in the same color as the concentration line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion performance, so that the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, a form in which a cut-in preview effect and a group preview effect can be executed as preview effects that suggest that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-3, as a preview effect, for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display from the timing of the start of the variable display or the timing of the re-variable display when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped may be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display as a preview effect, the execution of the preview effect may be restricted if the display of "x2", "x3", or "x4" is moved (enlarged) toward the player as the first variable display start count notification effect. This prevents the player from becoming unaware that the re-variable display will be executed as a result of the execution of the preview effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a form in which the re-variable display is executed on the image display device 5 without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo consecutive patterns from the player's perspective is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a visibility-impeding image (e.g., an image of an explosion) that reduces the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive patterns on the image display device 5 may be displayed, and the re-variable display may be executed after the visibility-impeding image is made non-display. In this way, the visibility-impeding image is displayed before the re-variable display is executed, making it easy to understand that the re-variable display is being executed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate made of a transparent plate material capable of displaying the above-mentioned visibility-impeding image by shining light from the outer peripheral side may be provided in front of the image display device 5 (at a position between the image display device 5 and the player) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, the visibility-impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate, making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5, thereby improving the impression on the player and enhancing the presentation effect of the visibility-impeding image.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo consecutive symbols always move downward and are not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo consecutive symbols may temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5 after starting to move downward. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data may be made different from the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols when they return to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5, so that the player can easily understand whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before passing through the center of the image display device 5 or after passing through the center of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive patterns pass through the center of the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5, the convergence lines may not be displayed again. By doing so, it is possible to make it even easier for the player to understand that the pseudo consecutive patterns pass through the center of the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, the pseudo consecutive performance can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, a super reach reach performance is executed in the same way as when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display (three times in the case of this characteristic section 193SG), a reach performance different from when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, a full rotation reach performance that has a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot than other super reach reach performances) may be executed. Note that when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display in this way, the full rotation reach performance may be executed without going through the re-variable display notification performance after the temporary stop notification performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a pseudo consecutive performance is exemplified in which the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped in the center (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) when the left and right decorative patterns are stopped with the same numerical value (reach state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Furthermore, as described above, a decorative pattern different from the pseudo consecutive pattern may be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo consecutive performance. Note that, for a form in which a decorative pattern different from the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo consecutive performance, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped in a specific combination, such as a combination of odd and even numbers such as "135" and "246", or a combination of so-called offset numbers such as "112" and "334".

(Description of Characteristic Part 225SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a description will be given of a characteristic section 225SG according to an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present characteristic section 225SG). Note that, in the present characteristic section 225SG, a description of the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be omitted.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player (e.g., a jackpot gaming state),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance image;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying a specific image displayed on the display means;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
A front-stage effect in which the specific image is moved and displayed (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-4(C) to FIG. 21-4(E)),
A first post-stage performance that is a successful mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (G) to FIG. 21-4 (H), a part where a pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped);
A second subsequent performance that is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image continues after the execution of the first performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (F), a part in which the pseudo consecutive patterns continue to move and are not displayed without being temporarily stopped) can be executed.
This is a characteristic feature of the device.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to grasp whether a suggestive performance is successful or unsuccessful, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
In the first stage, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-1, a portion in which a convergent line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the first latter stage performance, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (G), a part where an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed).
In the second latter stage performance, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (F), when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, the translucent effect display can increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and the specific image can be made difficult to see when it is displayed still, reducing the sense of incongruity when it is displayed still and emphasizing that it is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
In the first stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 as modified example 225SG-1, a part where a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in priority to a convergence line),
When the first latter stage performance is executed, an opaque effect display is displayed when the first latter stage performance is executed, so that the specific image is temporarily made difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (G), a portion where an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second latter stage performance is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (F), when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display in the background of the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and by making it difficult to see when the specific image is displayed still, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the image is displayed still and to emphasize that the image is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
In the first stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-5 as modified example 225SG-1, a portion where a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in priority to a convergence line),
In the second latter stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the specific image is erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 21-7(F) to Fig. 21-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5 due to the moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying an effect display in the background of the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed moving will be displayed still or not, and in the second second stage performance, the interest of the second stage performance is also increased by displaying an effect display from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
In the first stage performance, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-1, a portion in which a converging line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the second latter stage performance, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the specific image is erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 21-8(F) to Fig. 21-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5 due to the moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying a semi-transparent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed moving will be displayed stationary or not, and also in the second second stage performance, by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is erased, it is possible to increase the interest of the second stage performance.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
In the first stage performance, a semi-transparent, highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-1, a portion in which a convergent line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the first latter stage performance, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transparency effect display with a lower transparency than the high-transparency effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-9 as modified example 225SG-4, an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult for the player to see decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns).
In the second latter stage performance, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying a highly transparent effect display, it is possible to increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether a specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and by displaying a low-transparency effect display when a specific image is displayed still, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stopped display and to emphasize that the image is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
The first latter stage performance includes a performance in which the size of the specific image is enlarged compared to the size in the former stage performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-1 and FIG. 21-2, when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo consecutive pattern after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 6, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of the specific image displayed in a still state, and to further emphasize that the specific image is displayed in a still state.

The gaming machine of form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the first stage performance increases as the first stage performance progresses (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-4(C) to FIG. 21-4(E), the convergence lines move toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 7, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the specific image to be frozen and displayed, and to further increase the interest of the early performance.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
A notice performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 19 ) capable of executing a notice performance that notifies the occurrence of a specific event,
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first subsequent performance and the second subsequent performance, the execution of the advance notice performance is restricted (for example, as a modified example 225SG-5, a part that restricts the execution of the advance notice performance when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 8, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being reduced by the effects, which would reduce the interest in the preview performance.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the suggestion performance, a first suggestion performance (for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance shown in FIG. 21-11(C) as modified example 225SG-5) in which a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance) is displayed on the display means to perform the first stage performance and the first subsequent stage performance, or the first stage performance and the second subsequent stage performance, and a second suggestion performance (for example, an active display change suggestion performance shown in FIG. 21-11(D) to FIG. 21-11(F) as modified example 225SG-5) in which a second specific image having a display dimension smaller than that of the first specific image (for example, an image of an arrow having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggestion performance) is displayed on the display means to perform the first stage performance and the first subsequent stage performance, or the first stage performance and the second subsequent stage performance,
When executing the first latter stage performance as the first suggestion performance, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (B), a part in the image display device 5 that displays an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance),
When executing the first latter stage performance as the second suggestion performance, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 21-11 (D) to 21-11 (F), a part in which an arrow image is displayed as an active display change notice performance on the image display device 5 while an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 9, characterized in that
According to this feature, in the second suggestion performance, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is not displayed when the first latter performance is executed, thereby preventing the second specific image, which has a small display size, from becoming difficult to understand due to the effect display.

First, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 21-1(A) to 21-1(C), 21-2(A) to 21-2(C), and 21-3(A) to 21-3(C), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 21-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance in this feature section 225SG, Fig. 21-2 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and Fig. 21-3 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 21-2(A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display an effect image (effect image for temporary stop notification) to notify that the pseudo consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped across the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 21-1(A), the image data 2 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 21-1 (B), 21-2 (B), and 21-3 (A), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display a pseudo-consecutive pattern moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the data is drawn to display the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns at a larger size than when they are moving (as shown in FIG. 21-1(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop is a and the vertical dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. 21-2(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the vertical dimension is y (y>b)), and immediately after the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, the data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 225SG) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

As shown in FIG. 21-3(B), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figs. 21-1 to 21-3, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (converging lines) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (a moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols from top to bottom). Note that the converging lines in this feature section 225SG are set to a high transparency (for example, 50%), so that the player can see the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols through the converging lines while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in Figures 21-2(C) and 21-2(D), immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, the image based on image data 1 (the effect image for the temporary stop notification) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (the pseudo consecutive symbols that have become larger in size than when they were moving due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden after a certain period of time has passed before the start of the re-variable display.

The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 225SG has a transparency set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, as shown in Figures 21-2 (C) and 21-2 (D), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols invisible to the player, but after a certain period of time has passed, these decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, as shown in FIG. 21-3(C), the image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-repeated pattern) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 4 (a moving display of the pseudo-repeated pattern from the center downwards on the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, while the temporary stop suggestion presentation is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 21-1 on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop (see FIG. 20-33 of the aforementioned characteristic unit 193), the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop (FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2) to image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 21-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 21-4.

First, as shown in Figures 21-4(A) to 21-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first tentative stop suggestion performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from top to bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in Figures 21-4(C) to 21-4(E), on the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the center of the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are no longer displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping, becoming hidden, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 21-4 (G) and 21-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily invisible. If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are continuously moved toward the bottom of the image display device 5 without displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification, and then hidden. This makes it easier for the player to understand the success (temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) and failure (non-temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, during the temporary stop indication performance, a concentrated line with high transparency is displayed on the image display device 5, which draws the player's attention to whether the moving pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop or not, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, an effect image with a transparency of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5 for notifying the player of the temporary stop, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop are displayed larger than before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the top-bottom width dimension is b, whereas the left-right width dimension at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the top-bottom width dimension is y (y>b)). This improves the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns and further emphasizes the temporary stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop may be a timing just before the temporary stop, or a timing after the temporary stop, such as a timing when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the shape or color of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be changed from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 21-4 (C) to 21-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop is increased by displaying the converging lines moving toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop may be increased by changing the color of the converging lines or increasing the number of lines displayed (increasing the density of the converging lines) as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses.

The characteristic features of the present invention, 225SG, have been described above using drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 21-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 21-5(A) to FIG. 21-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in Figures 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentration lines on the image display device 5 are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and it is possible to prevent the concentration lines from making it difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (F), and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 21-6 (G) and 21-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration lines are hidden and then the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 21-7(A) to 21-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden, while the concentration lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are hidden, up to the timing when the variable display stops.

In this way, as in modified example 225SG-1, the concentration lines are displayed as an image behind the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of the performance of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as in the characteristic part 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 21-8(A) to 21-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, the decorative pattern and pseudo-repeated pattern are displayed as images behind the converging lines, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop, the converging lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns are temporarily made invisible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 21-9(A) to 21-9(C) as modified example 225SG-4, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance lower than that of the converging lines (for example, 20%).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 21-10, during the period when the concentration lines are displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period up to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency of the concentration lines is high (for example, the aforementioned 50%), allowing the player to easily see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns through the concentration lines, while during the period when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect (the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency is lower than that of the concentration lines (for example, the aforementioned 20%), making it more difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns than during the period when the concentration lines are displayed.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, a form in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo consecutive effects during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a preview effect (see FIG. 20-29 in the characteristic section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot may be executed as an effect different from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects. Note that these preview effects may be executed when a convergence line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the execution of the preview effect may be restricted when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. In this way, the execution of the preview effect can draw the player's attention to whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and by restricting the execution of the preview effect when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview effect from being reduced by the effect image for the temporary stop notification, which reduces the interest of the preview effect.

Also, as a preview effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 21-11 as modified example 225SG-5, for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that when a pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop again as a result of the next pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, an active display area 225SG005F that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display at a specified position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device), and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change may be executed.

In this way, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, for example, as shown in Figures 21-11 (A) to 21-11 (C), an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect at the top of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stopping as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect begins from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, but the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect becomes visible to the player from the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden.

On the other hand, when an active display change preview performance is executed as a preview performance, as shown in Figure 21-11 (A) and Figures 21-11 (D) to 21-11 (F), an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and an image of the active display change preview performance (in this modified example 225SG-5, an image of an arrow with a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) flying from the right side of the image display device 5 toward the active display area 225SG005F) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (E), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, causing the display mode of the active display to change. When the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (F), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 passes toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display, and then becomes invisible.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

(Description of Characteristic Part 225SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a description will be given of a characteristic part 225SG according to an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present characteristic part 225SG). Note that, in the present characteristic part 225SG, a description of the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be omitted.

First, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 21-1(A) to 21-1(C), 21-2(A) to 21-2(C), and 21-3(A) to 21-3(C), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 21-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance in this feature section 225SG, Fig. 21-2 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and Fig. 21-3 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 21-2(A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display an effect image (effect image for temporary stop notification) to notify that the pseudo consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped across the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 21-1(A), the image data 2 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 21-1 (B), 21-2 (B), and 21-3 (A), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display a pseudo-consecutive pattern moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the data is drawn to display the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns at a larger size than when they are moving (as shown in FIG. 21-1(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop is a and the vertical dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. 21-2(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the vertical dimension is y (y>b)), and immediately after the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, the data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 225SG) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

As shown in FIG. 21-3(B), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figs. 21-1 to 21-3, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (converging lines) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (a moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols from top to bottom). Note that the converging lines in this feature section 225SG are set to a high transparency (for example, 50%), so that the player can see the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols through the converging lines while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in Figures 21-2(C) and 21-2(D), immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, the image based on image data 1 (the effect image for the temporary stop notification) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (the pseudo consecutive symbols that have become larger in size than when they were moving due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden after a certain period of time has passed before the start of the re-variable display.

The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 225SG has a transparency set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, as shown in Figures 21-2 (C) and 21-2 (D), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols invisible to the player, but after a certain period of time has passed, these decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, as shown in FIG. 21-3(C), the image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-repeated pattern) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 4 (a moving display of the pseudo-repeated pattern from the center downwards on the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, while the temporary stop suggestion presentation is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 21-1 on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop (see FIG. 20-33 of the aforementioned characteristic unit 193), the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop (FIGS. 21-1 and 21-2) to image data in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 21-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 21-4.

First, as shown in Figures 21-4(A) to 21-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first tentative stop suggestion performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from top to bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in Figures 21-4(C) to 21-4(E), on the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the center of the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are no longer displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping, becoming hidden, as shown in FIG. 21-4 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 21-4 (G) and 21-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily invisible. If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are continuously moved toward the bottom of the image display device 5 without displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification, and then hidden. This makes it easier for the player to understand the success (temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) and failure (non-temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, during the temporary stop indication performance, a concentrated line with high transparency is displayed on the image display device 5, which draws the player's attention to whether the moving pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop or not, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, an effect image with a transparency of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5 for notifying the player of the temporary stop, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop are displayed larger than before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the top-bottom width dimension is b, whereas the left-right width dimension at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the top-bottom width dimension is y (y>b)). This improves the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns and further emphasizes the temporary stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop may be a timing just before the temporary stop, or a timing after the temporary stop, such as a timing when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the shape or color of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be changed from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 21-4 (C) to 21-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop is increased by displaying the converging lines moving toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop may be increased by changing the color of the converging lines or increasing the number of lines displayed (increasing the density of the converging lines) as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses.

The characteristic features of the present invention, 225SG, have been described above using drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 21-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 21-5(A) to FIG. 21-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in Figures 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentration lines on the image display device 5 are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and it is possible to prevent the concentration lines from making it difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (F), and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 21-6 (G) and 21-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration lines are hidden and then the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 21-7(A) to 21-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden, while the concentration lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are hidden, up to the timing when the variable display stops.

In this way, as in modified example 225SG-1, the concentration lines are displayed as an image behind the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of the performance of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as in the characteristic part 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 21-8(A) to 21-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, the decorative pattern and pseudo-repeated pattern are displayed as images behind the converging lines, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop, the converging lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns are temporarily made invisible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 21-9(A) to 21-9(C) as modified example 225SG-4, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance lower than that of the converging lines (for example, 20%).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 21-10, during the period when the concentration lines are displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency of the concentration lines is high (for example, the above-mentioned 50%), so that the player can easily see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns through the concentration lines, while during the period when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency is lower than that of the concentration lines (for example, the above-mentioned 20%), so that the player may find it more difficult to see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns than during the period when the concentration lines are displayed. Note that, although not specifically shown in this modified example 225SG-4, if the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the performance of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, as in other characteristic parts and modified examples.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, a form in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo consecutive effects during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 225SG-5, a preview effect (see FIG. 20-29 in the characteristic section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot may be executed as an effect different from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects during the variable display. Note that these preview effects may be executed when a convergence line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the execution of the preview effect may be restricted when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. In this way, the execution of the preview effect can draw the player's attention to whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and by restricting the execution of the preview effect when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview effect from being reduced by the effect image for the temporary stop notification, which reduces the interest of the preview effect.

Also, as a preview effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 21-11 as modified example 225SG-5, for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that when a pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop again as a result of the next pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, an active display area 225SG005F that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display at a specified position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device), and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change may be executed.

In this way, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, for example, as shown in Figures 21-11 (A) to 21-11 (C), an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect at the top of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stopping as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect begins from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, but the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect becomes visible to the player from the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden.

On the other hand, when an active display change preview performance is executed as a preview performance, as shown in Figure 21-11 (A) and Figures 21-11 (D) to 21-11 (F), an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and an image of the active display change preview performance (in this modified example 225SG-5, an image of an arrow with a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) flying from the right side of the image display device 5 toward the active display area 225SG005F) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (E), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, causing the display mode of the active display to change. When the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 21-11 (F), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 passes toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display, and then becomes invisible.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

In addition, in the feature 193SG and the feature 225SG, a pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by changing the display mode of the reserved memory display or the like at the timing of the end of the variable display, it is possible to execute a reserved memory display change performance that suggests that the variable display result corresponding to the reserved memory display will be a jackpot, and a case may be provided in which a pattern (reserved memory display change notification pattern) indicating that the reserved memory display will change is stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. In this way, when the reserved memory display change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, it is possible to execute a performance (suggestion performance in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature 193SG or the feature 225SG, targeting whether or not the reserved memory display change notification pattern stops.

In addition, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of images can be displayed as background images on the image display device 5, and the probability that the variable display result being executed will be a jackpot can be suggested according to the background image being displayed. In addition, a pattern (background image change notification pattern) indicating that the background image will change can be stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative patterns. In this way, when the background image change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, a performance (suggestion performance in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature unit 193SG or the feature unit 225SG can be executed based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern stops.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

In addition, although this specification has given examples of multiple characteristic features and variations as configurations of the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these multiple characteristic features and variations, or may implement only one characteristic feature or variation.

For example, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a form has been exemplified in which a symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) that indicates that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one symbol out of a plurality of decorative symbols, or as a symbol different from the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a combination of decorative symbols (stopping symbols), and to execute a performance equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature unit 193SG or the feature unit 225SG (suggestion performance in the present invention) for the stopping of a symbol that suggests that a specific setting value has been set.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 ... Pachinko game machine 4A ... First special symbol display device 4B ... Second special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 50 ... Special variable winning ball device 51 ... V winning area 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
120 ... Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player by performing variable display of performance identification information,
A start-time performance execution means capable of executing a start-time performance in response to the start of the advantageous state;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect by temporarily stopping the specific effect identification information at a predetermined timing during the variable display and then restarting the variable display;
A suggested performance execution means capable of executing a suggested performance that suggests that the predetermined performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification performance execution means capable of executing a notification performance that notifies that the predetermined performance identification information has been temporarily stopped;
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect after the execution of the notification effect;
Equipped with
the suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestion performance, a performance in which visibility of performance identification information different from the predetermined performance identification information is temporarily reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display different from the predetermined performance identification information, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having even lower visibility than the first low visibility state;
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing, as the notification performance, a performance in which performance identification information different from the predetermined performance identification information is made invisible;
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the predetermined performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the predetermined performance identification information does not temporarily stop, is capable of continuously displaying the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed;
In a case where the predetermined effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, a moving speed of the predetermined effect identification information before the predetermined timing is different from a moving speed of the predetermined effect identification information after the predetermined timing,
The start-time performance execution means is capable of executing a common start-time performance in a case where the game is controlled to a first state after the advantageous state ends and in a case where the game is controlled to a second state after the advantageous state ends;
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect that displays a specific display corresponding to the number of times the variable display is restarted, which is different from the suggestive effect and the notification effect,
In the special performance, the specific display may be displayed in a first size, a second size larger than the first size, and a third size smaller than the second size.
The execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the suggestion effect,
The execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the notification effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images